New Beginnings
One.
When the four Carpenter brothers, Judah, Daniel, Abraham and
Jacob determined to leave the safety of their Daddy’s home in Tennessee there
was one thing they each had in mind. It was simple. They wanted a place of their
own. They wanted land to farm, to raise youngin’s. They wanted a good life.
Sounds pretty simple. A good life. Folks often talk about
wantin’ a good life. They seldom are able to express what that actually means.
Many times, money is mentioned as part of that dream of the good life. Fact is,
money is seldom the result of a good life. Money can often be the result of a
life that is anything but “good”.
For the Carpenter brothers there was an underlyin’ factor
that needs to be understood. There were five brothers in that Tennessee family.
Isham was the youngest. They was all mostly grown. Their Daddy, David did his
best to make a good life for his family. Back then, just after the War of
Independence, folks would look at the Carpenter homestead, at them five healthy
young men that was helpin’ their Daddy manage an’ maintain the good life an’
envy what that family had.
Trouble was, too many neighbors moved in. Not that neighbor
was a bad thing. Fact is, havin’ folks around was a fine thing. Gave them boys
girls to notice. Gave safety in numbers. Gave folks opportunities to trade
goods. Good neighbors was a help with big tasks. Barn raisin’s, bringin’ crops when
nature threatened, protectin’ each other in times of war an’ against evil men,
all them things was the reason neighbors was a “good thing”.
Neighbors claimed land. Neighbors build their own
homesteads. Neighbors crowded around each other. That left no opportunity for
them five Carpenter brothers to have much land for themselves. They all
realized their Daddy’s land was fine land. Good soil, good waterways too.
Was it enough to support not one, but six families? A couple
of them five boys was already married. Youngin’s would soon be flowin’ from the
loins of them boys. The younger brothers was already lookin’ toward the farms
of neighbors for gals to flirt with. Eventually they too would find a bride an’
marry.
When cousins came back from over across the Cumberland Gap
they told of large tracts of untamed, unclaimed, unexplored land “over yonder”.
Mountain men have always dreamed of the great “over yonder”.
It is not a specific place. It is more than that. It is what causes adventurous
men to get all dreamy-eyed as they talk of them wide open, unexplored places.
“Over yonder” is infectious. “Over yonder” takes the songs about Heaven an’
life eternal an’ attaches it to places unknown an’ unexplored.
Over yonder is a dream, a drug, a hope that can be seen in
the face of a wanderer as they stand on a ridge an’ look into a land promised
but yet unrealized.
“Over yonder” was across the Cumberland Gap for so many men.
That “over yonder” was secrets whispered by young men, brothers who snuck off
to talk, plan an’ dream away from home just a short distance. “Over yonder” was
a need that made their hearts an’ even their loins ache as they whispered an’
dreamed. They dreamed of a good life. They ached for wives, youngin’s, a future
of their own. Their hearts, minds an’ loins tugged at them. They dreamed, ached
an’ planned together.
The problem was difficult. How do they tell? What do they
say? How shall they hurt an’ scatter their Daddy’s dreams of a “good life” for
his family?
“Over yonder” was callin’.
Two.
You may remember them four boys planned for a right smart
while. They would meet in the dead of night. They’d sneak out to the barn to
meet. One would go into the hill behind the cabin. Another would seem to head
toward the privy. The twins, Abraham an’ Jacob always did things together. They
was still young. They’d just wander off.
They fought in the war even though some of them boys weren’t
old enough to fight. They should have stayed home. When their Daddy went off to
fight, he had a fire in his belly. He had a full head of steam as he spoke to
them about independence. His fire ignited the hopes an’ dreams of four boys. It
was no wonder they followed after.
Judah an’ Daniel was the only ones with a rifle. When Judah
went off to fight he’d leave Daniel an’ his rifle home to protect the
homestead. Judah would return an’ Daniel would go off to war. Unlike their
Daddy, they went back an’ forth to fight for a while an’ then home to work the
fields, to harvest or to plant. When Judah would come home he’d pass his rifle
off to one of the younger boys.
Along the way all four brothers was able to acquire rifles, knives
an’ kits on the battlefields. After a skirmish the battlefields was littered
with bodies an’ weaponry. Them boys weren’t the only ones to salvage weapons,
powder an’ lead from the fields.
Yessir, they all fought in the war. They made their Daddy
an’ their fledglin’ country proud. That’s the great War, don’t you know, the
War for Independence. Daddy David fought without comin’ home. He left his boys
in charge. He knew they’d been taught well.. He couldn’t read nor write. However,
he had a good head on his ol’ shoulders. He could do figures in his head. He
did learn to sign his name. When he received his papers that gave him a land
grant for his service in the Continental Army, why, he signed them papers right
big, just like ol’ John Hancock did when he signed that there Declaration.
He couldn’t read a lick. Didn’t know the letters he signed.
He just was taught how to sign his name. David’s land grant was for 750 acres.
Durin’ the war he’d been made a sergeant. He commanded men that was more
educated than him. He made decisions not only on the battlefield but durin’
plannin’ an’ preparations for battles. Those under his command respected an’
obeyed his orders because he knew how to take the fight to the Red Coats on his
terms.
David Carpenter weren’t much for linin’ men up an’ marchin’
toward gunfire. Never did make sense to him. He’d lived in the hills of what
became to be known as the Appalachian Mountains. His troops were much like the
Overmountain Men that fought the British. Them troops was named that because
they came from west of the Appalachian Mountains where their settlements was.
Many of them men knew the ways of the tribes around them.
Many lived in places where they had to defend from attacks. No sense in talkin’
about who was right or wrong when them folks settled where they did. They
weren’t in the midst of treaties, land ownership an’ such.
All they knew was they had to defend themselves an’ their
families.
They learned from that. Their learned that the native folks
didn’t line up an’ walk in a line into battle. They learned stealth. They
learned usin’ the land to their advantage. They learned the value of camouflage
an’ stealth.
Them mountain boys learned that the British weren’t prepared
to fight in a new way.
That’s how David an’ his boys earned their land grants.
David an’ others came from the region that was at one time
part of the Carolinas. Later as states was carved out their homesteads became
part of Tennessee. Some of that Carpenter clan still lives on the original
homestead lands to this day.
No one knew whatever happened to David’s land grant. The
four brothers knew he claimed the land. They knew he had a cousin who was a
surveyor go with him to find, survey an’ claim the land.
Problem was, they was all busy seekin’ out their own piece
of the future over across the Cumberland Gap.
Three.
Over the years the Carpenter homestead spread over the 126
acres David originally claimed years back. That might sound like a right large
spread. What folks need to realize is that spread was in the mountains of
Appalachia. That Tennessee homestead down there in Hawkins County, Tennessee
weren’t acre after acre of beautiful flat meadows. If folks wanted huge, gently
rollin’ fields just waitin’ for a plow to break the ground for the first time
in history they needed to travel up to the Bluegrass area of Kentucky. Perhaps
settlers would be better served way off to the west in Ohio country or even
further into what became Indiana or Illinois.
Sure, them wide flat prairies had an appeal to men that
sought to plow an’ plant hundreds of acres. Men like David Carpenter just
didn’t see the need to travel to that distant ground. What he sought out was a
place to raise a family, not to feed a nation.
Men left hearth an’ home back then easily. Weren’t no long
time plannin’ as they said their goodbyes. They took up their rifle an’ pack.
They knew about where “over yonder” would be. Their plans might include some
simple necessities like a good knife, perhaps a hatchet too. They’d have powder,
lead, flints an’ such. A man needs a good supply of those when he left out.
Food was abundant. Food was one of the easy needs to meet
back then. Water was abundant in the hills an’ hollers. The mountains of
Appalachia, especially in Tennessee an’ Kentucky were filled with streams,
natural springs, ponds an’ lakes. Unspoiled, untainted water for the
adventurer.
When David found that place in what became Hawkins County,
Tennessee he was not the first man to walk the trails he followed. Like many
who traveled those paths before him, he found the natural paths the wildlife
traveled. Along the valleys, close to the waterways he traveled the buffalo
traces.
Those who do not know the hills of Appalachia might assume
there were other paths to take. Folks who know them mountains realized quickly
that the streams an’ rivers gave the best purchase into the wilderness. River
cane grew thick, abundant along them waterways.
The mountains were full of buffalo, elk, whitetail deer.
Smaller game, rabbits, squirrel, even racoons were not only abundant but not
wary of the first travelers into their domain. Black bears roamed easily
through the hills. Panthers, called “painters” or “panters” by the mountain
folks hunted wide ranges an’ were no strangers to the early travelers.
It was no wonder that David Carpenter found an’ paused in
that wide valley down home. The terrain almost made a bowl with mountains all
around. The low hills surroundin’ the valley kept much of the weather at bay.
Two streams intersected the flat meadow between. One stream ran deep an’ clear.
It was filled with pan fish like bluegill, an’ in deep holes there was the
occasional trout. Catfish, suckers, carp could be seen easily as they wandered
along the river bottoms searchin’ for food. Crawdads, mudpuppies an’ mussels
assured the pilgrim that the water was clean.
The smaller stream was still fresh an’ deep enough to bathe
in. There was plenty of creekbank that gave purchase to the cold, clear waters.
Livestock would have no trouble walkin’ into an’ even crossin’ the creek.
It was no wonder that David stood on the sides of them hills
an’ looked down into that little Tennessee valley an’ paused.
It was no wonder that as he stood an’ took account of what
lay before him that he said to himself, “This looks like home.”
4.
Yessir, David homesteaded 126 acres of Tennessee land. 126
acres deep in the heart of Appalachia. If folks were to walk them acres they
might be surprised. There were only about 39 of them acres that was in the
little holler that became home to the Carpenter clan.
Much of the land David claimed years back was on the
hillsides surroundin’ that holler. Modern folks might wonder why. Modern folks
might question the wisdom of ownin’ land that would never be tillable. Modern
folks might not see the utility of them hills.
Cows made paths back an’ forth on them hills. Never straight
up. Always back an’ forth as they’d graze on the sweet grasses an’ such that
grew lush there. Their constant grazin’ made the hillsides appear to be
terraced by their horizontal paths.
Hogs wandered them hillsides too.
Y’see, hogs don’t mind hillsides. Fact is, them hogs Daniel
owned weren’t penned up in a barn, pigpen or hog lot most of the time. Mountain
folks would mark their ears to identify their pigs much like cattle or horses
would be branded. One ear or the other might have a notch cut out as a farmer’s
mark. They might have several notches to identify the owner. Then them pigs was
let out to feed an’ grub through the land. They’d wander the hills, getting’
fat off the hickory nuts, acorns, chestnuts an’ such. They’d root for worms,
insects, fungi that appealed to a hog’s palate.
That palate weren’t too particular.
Through the spring an’ summer the farmer would put out corn
or slop on a regular basis.That would lure them pigs in close an’ keep them
connected to the farm. They’d get used to bein’ around folks. They’d be easier
to round up.
Come late summer or early fall the farmers would begin to
round up the hogs. They’d be put in the pens an’ fattened up. Come the cool
weather an’ early frosts an’ a farmer would step outside to feel the change in
season.
Cool weather meant “hog killin’ time”. Don’t reckon that’s
appealin’ to modern folks. For a family back there in the 1800s it were a time
of hard work an’ great reward. Cool weather meant they family could process a
hog without worryin’ about meat spoilin’.
There weren’t much that was wasted. Fat was rendered into
lard. Add a little salt to the lard an’ it would keep almost indefinitely. Skin
was scraped before the hog was processed. That skin an’ bits of meat an’ fat
became “cracklins”. Them cracklin’s was a snack that lured even the most
experienced. Cracklin’s was fished out of the renderin’ lard an’ laid aside to
cool. Hungry fingers would snatch at them things, forgettin’ the lessons
learned in years past. Hungry lips an’ tongues would be burned if them fingers
weren’t. It was a treat too good to wait.
If the family waited an’ was reserved there’d be enough
cracklin’s to make “crackling bread. That’s cornbread with a generous portion
of cracklin’s stirred in. My oh my. Youngin’s an’ adults would slobber over a
piece of that cracklin’ bread. They knew it was a cool weather treat.
Side meat, pork belly an’ shoulders an’ hams was salted or
maybe just hung in the smokehouse. The hams definitely was laid out on the
saltin’ board. A generous heapin’ of salt was laid down first. Then the hams
an’ shoulders would be laid on. More salt would cover the hams completely. That
salt would draw out the excess moisture. Them hams would eventually be hung to
dry an’ age.
The pork belly weren’t salted. It was hung an’ smoked. Apple
wood was the best if it were available. Hickory wood was the most abundant an’
bacon that were hickory smoked was just about as good as that apple wood smoked
bacon. Folks didn’t turn their noses up at either type of smoked bacon.
Now, don’t forget the ham hocks. They was hung an’ smoked
too. One or two of them ham hocks in a pot of beans added flavor an’ a dab of
meat.
Won’t go into the process of makin’ souse, scrapple or head
cheese. Y’all might be too delicate to read tall that process. Just know that
it all was used. Everything from the snout to the tail. Why, they didn’t even
waste the oink.
Yessir, David Carpenter’s clan ate good on them hilly acres.
They lived a good life. It just was gettin’ a mite crowded in the eyes of them
four Carpenter brothers.
5.
The Carpenter homestead down in Hawkins County, Tennessee
weren’t part of the land grant David earned when he fought against the British
in the War for Independence. He’d already settled down there years before. He’d
seen a lot over the years, long before neighbors moved in.
He had a few Cherokee men that passed through. Two very
young Choctaw braves was in his corn field down by the creek bank a few years
back. They was down there roastin’ ears of corn an’ enjoyin’ the day. They had
a small fire goin’ an’ had a big ol’ catfish on a spit.
When David saw the smoke, he was concerned that there was a
wildfire in his field. He usually carried his long rifle when he traipsed
through the hills. That smoke down in his corn field was worry enough to cause
him to leave that long rifle at the cabin.
He hollered to his wife that there was a fire. Told her to
keep the youngin’s in close. That’s just in case the hillside caught on fire.
Nature tended to cleanse the mountains on occasion with
wildfires. The fires would creep along a hillside, burnin’ the brush an’
undergrowth. Them fires was never big enough to burn down the old growth
forests. Sure, the bark might get singed an’ scarred. The livin’ wood
underneath weren’t ever in danger when them fires snaked all around.
With the undergrowth gone, them big old growth trees could
flourish. Wildlife was abundant an’ folks could pass through quickly an’
easily. A feller’s hog could root an’ grub around better.
That’s how them Choctaw braves found their way to the edge
of Daniel Carpenter’s corn field. That corn was still young an’ tender. Just
right for good roastin’ ears. By fall them ears would harden an’ be good for
grindin’ to make meal or feedin’ to the livestock.
David had a right good field of corn. He weren’t goin’ to
miss the dozen or so ears that them Indian boys harvested.
He rushed down to where he saw the smoke. When he came out
from between the rows of corn he stopped like he’d been clobbered with a maul.
He just stopped an’ stood lookin’ at them young braves.
When they saw him come rushin’ out from between the rows
they were startled. They both reached for their knives that hung on their
belts. When they saw Daniel was unarmed, they relaxed, grinned an’ looked a
little guilty. One swept his hand toward the rows of corn an’ then motioned
toward David as if to ask if the corn was his.
David nodded. They both did a sort of bow as they sat, as if
to say thanks. They then pointed to the catfish roastin’ on the spit. The older
of the two pointed toward the ground beside them an’ invited Daniel to sit an’
join them.
He grinned an’ nodded. Didn’t need words to understand the
invite to sit an’ eat. They handed him an ear of his corn. The younger one
handed Daniel a small leather pouch that contained salt as well as several
grains of wild rice. Daniel had seen that before. The grains of wild rice
absorbed moisture an’ kept the salt from cakin’.
It was a gracious offer. He accepted an’ took a pinch of
salt to rub onto his roastin’ ear. They three sat an’ ate with gusto. The only
words were satisfied grunts from the three men.
Soon the catfish was done. They broke the flesh into three
portions. Daniel nodded his appreciation as he took the portion offered.
After they finished the impromptu thanksgivin’ meal, the
young braves stood. Daniel stood an’ held out his hand. They’d been around
white men enough to understand. Instead of just shakin’ his hand, they each
gripped his forearm.
David pointed to himself an’ said, “David”.
They understood. The oldest of the two pointed to himself
an’ said, “Takoda” in the followin’ years David learned that name meant “Friend
to everybody”.
The younger brave, Takoda’s brother pointed to his chest an’
said, “Ahanu”. That meant “He who laughs”
As their friendship grew over the years, Takoda an’ Ahanu
wanted to know what “David” meant. David eventually explained it was a Hebrew
name. When they were able to understand each other the two Choctaw men took
great meaning to David’s name when they learned it was in the language of the
“Hebrew tribe from other lands across the waters”.
David explained his name meant “God is my judge”.
6.
David motioned to the two young braves an’ invited them to
follow him to his cabin. They hesitated. He motioned again. They turned to each
other an’ spoke for several moments. Finally, they turned back to Daniel an’
nodded.
That universal sign showed that they were willin’ to follow
David through the row of corn. He had hesitated to invite them to follow him at
first. However, he decided it didn’t hurt to have friends an’ perhaps allies
other than other white settlers.
As he approached the cabin, he turned an’ motioned that he
was goin’ to call out to his family. They seemed to understand.
“Woman, boys, I’m comin’ back an’ I have two visitors.
They’s Indians, hon. I just ate with them. I think it’s safe. Don’t be afraid.
Don’t act scared an’ all.” He called.
“You OK David? You sure?” his wife called.
“Yes, all is well.” He replied.
The three exited the rows of corn. Both the Choctaw men had
breechcloths as well as knee high leggin’s. Their feet were bare. Both had settler
style “over the head” shirts under a vest like garment made of sueded leather.
Takoda an’ Ahanu carried bows in their left hands. A quiver hung on a belt
around their waist as did a knife. The knives were obviously trade knives as
they were made of steel but with bone handles.
David’s wife had a cautious smile as they approached. They
paused a few feet away from the porch she stood on. They nodded their heads an’
first Takoda n’ then Ahanu pointed to their chest an’ repeated their names.
About that time Judah an’ Daniel, the first two of the four
Carpenter boys came out of the cabin an’ stood beside their mother. The twins
hadn’t been born yet. Judah an’ Daniel, who his Daddy called “Danny” were still
eleven an’ ten.
David’s wife patted each on the head. She pointed to herself
an’ said, “Selby” she then pointed to each boy an’ repeated their names.
Though Selby invited the braves into the cabin, they
declined. She went inside an’ brought out the water bucket an’ the drinkin’
gourd. She offered them a sup of cold water. Their eyes grew big as she made
that offer. Perhaps, Daniel thought, not every settler tried to make friends
with these men an’ their tribe.
7.
Both Judah an’ Danny were curious. They also had no fear of
these strange men an’ their different dress. Takoda an’ Ahanu both sat on the
edge of the porch an’ talked in their own tongue to the boys. They showed their
bows to the boys, twanged the bowstring an’ pulled the bow back.
Ahanu motioned to David to ask with his motions if he could
demonstrate how the bow shot. Daniel nodded his assent. Ahanu looked around an’
noticed a hedge apple, Osage orange tree nearby. He laid down his bow an’
walked over to pick up several hedge apples. He placed the hedge apples on the
top of several fence posts.
Once he was back, he picked up his bow, nocked an’ arrow an’
shot each of the hedge apples off the posts. Them boys was thrilled an
fascinated. Both Ahanu an’ Takoda allowed the boys to try an’ pull back their
bows. Neither had the strength to bend the Osage orange wood bows to full draw.
The rest of the afternoon was spent in language lessons of
sorts. It started with Ahanu showin’ the boys things an’ repeatin’ his words
for that item. The bow, arrow an’ even the hedge apples became part of the
lesson. The boys, in turn, told the young braves the English word for that
object.
The braves followed the two boys around the homestead. First
the braves an’ then the boys would point to an object an’ name it in their
language. David an’ Selby sat on the porch an’ grinned all that afternoon.
Toward evenin’ Selby slipped inside. David could hear her
rattlin’ around an’ suspected what she was doin’. After a good while she called
not only to the boys but also to Takoda an’ Ahanu. She motioned the them to
come to the porch.
At the end of the porch, she’d set up a bucket of warm
water, soap an’ a rough towel. She pointed inside to the supper table an’ then
to the water. The braves shook their heads an’ motioned that they would leave.
She shook hers, tapped her feet an’ let them know that in any language or tribe
the Mama was in charge.
The Choctaw boys both blushed an’ nodded. They understood.
They made their way to the end of the porch. Judah an’ Danny went first. They
washed their hands with soap an’ used another gourd dipper to pour water over
each other’s hands. They then dried on the rough towel.
First Takoda an’ then Ahanu took up the soap. They smelled
it, tasted it an’ made a face. Danny laughed an’ motioned for them to use the
soap to make a lather on their hands. Once that was done, Danny poured warm
water over their hands an’ pointed to the towel.
Once inside, Selby seated her boys on one side of the table
on a bench. Another bench was on the other side. She pointed to that bench an’
motioned to the Choctaw boys to sit. She apparently had that “Mama” look in her
eyes for the two didn’t hesitate this time.
Selby poured hot potato an’ bacon soup into bowls an’ sat
bowls in front of each of the four at the table. Daniel finished washin’ his
hands an’ sat down at the head of the table. Selby served David an’ then put a
bowl of soup at her place at the other end of the table.
She laid a large pone of cornbread beside each bowl. In the
center of the table was a saucer with a big ol’ sweet onion she’d cut up. She
handed the saucer around an’ all the boys an’ David took several slices.
The Choctaw braves looked to Selby. She folded her hands,
lowered her head an’ looked at her boys. They folded their hands, lowered their
heads an’ waited. On cue both Takoda n’ Ahanu did the same.
David said a few words of blessin’ over the meal an’
finished with an’ “Amen”. Selby repeated the “Amen’ an’ then her boys did the
same. Again, as if on cue, both Takoda an’ Ahanu repeated, in their own liltin’
voices, “Aha-mine”.
8.
Those ears of roasted corn an’ the tater soup supper forged
a friendship that lasted for years. Takoda, Ahanu an’ their immediate family
didn’t live near the Carpenter homestead. Their family, part of the greater
Choctaw tribe were more or less migratory. There were a number of permanent
Choctaw villages in the south as well as in Tennessee. This family, however had
learned to trade in furs. They followed the migrations of the buffalo, deer as
well as elk. It the late summer an’ fall the family would travel north to hunt
an’ trap. Like the long hunters, they trapped beaver, mink an’ other fur
bearin’ animals along the waterways.
They hunted the deer, buffalo, bear an’ elk with bow an’
arrow. When the winter was at the coldest, they would once again make their way
south. Their pack horses would be burdened with the hides they gathered durin’
the fall. That’s when the furs were the thickest an’ most luxurious. Those furs
brough the best money as they sold their goods to the white merchants.
The rest of the year they lived in a permanent settlement in
Georgia. The Choctaw were considered to be one of the “Five Civilized Tribes”
because of their usual friendly attitudes toward the white settlers and their
easy adoption of the white customs an’ lifestyles.
Each fall the two young men would find opportunity to stop
to visit with David an’ his family. A year after the first visit, Judah an’
Danny were joined by their twin brothers, Abraham an’ Jacob. The young Choctaw
braves were, in fact, sixteen an’ fifteen. Judah an’ Daniel were eleven an’ ten.
The Choctaw boys were not too many years older than Judah an’ Danny when they
first met the Carpenter clan.
Those four boys grew into men as the family’s friendship
grew.
The third fall after the first encounter, they brought their
father to visit an’ meet David. By that time their understandin’ of the English
language had greatly improved. Their father also had a decent understandin’ of
the foreign language. His introduction to the Carpenter clan had future
ramifications to the whole can an’ that ongoin’ relationship.
David an’ Selby had a decent grasp of Takoda an’ Ahanu’s
language. The two boys had an’ even better understandin’. They were always
hungry to learn new words when the Choctaw braves visited. Each visit would
find Danny an’ Judah leadin’ one of the others around an’ pointin’ to things to
find out the word for that object. Judah loved to ask, “How do you say…”.
Takoda learned that Daniel was willin’ to trade furs he
harvested for salt, cones of raw sugar an’ other trade goods. When fall arrived
David would have several hides ready. His family would sit an’ have a meal with
the two braves. There was never any talk of tradin’ as they visited. Once the
meal was over, he would go out to the barn with Takoda an’ Ahanu.
It was a good-natured game for all three. They would examine
the furs. They would speak to one another in their language, commentin’ with
enough words that David knew so as to allow him to hear their commentary on the
furs. Of course they would shake their heads an’ “tsk tsk” as if the furs were
ruined an’ not worth tradin’.
David would puff up his chest an’ tell tales of his valor
an’ heroics as he hunted or trapped each animal. They would laugh as he boasted
of amazin’ hunts that not even legendary hunters didn’t experience.
They would offer small, tiny bags of salt, perhaps a pouch
of wild rice in trade of the furs. David would appear to be offended to the
point of tears at the offer. They would raise their offer little by little. David
would pull out most of the furs to offer in exchange.
One of the tricks he’d pull each fall was to offer an’ ol’
beat up bear skin that he kept hangin’ in the barn. It had been harvested from
a bear that drowned in a spring flood. He tried to salvage the carcass when he
found it. Problem was, the fur sloughed off the skin an’ even the skin
underneath was in tatters.
He’d offer that fur for all the goods the young Choctaw men
laid out. Their eyes would grow big an’ they’d shake their heads. As they
appeared to pick up their goods an’ leave one of the three would eventually
begin to laugh. That’s when the real trade happened.
They’d relate to David what furs would goin’ for as they
traded down south. The three came to easy trades, as friends always do.
9.
When Takoda an’ Ahanu brought their father along they were
excited for the meetin’ with David Carpenter. Their father’s name was “Teneca”
which meant, as best defined, “He controls self”. They saw many of their
father’s characteristics in Daniel.
When the two older men met, there was an instant regard one
for the other. Teneca, as mentioned, acquired a good deal of the English
language as he traded with white traders an’ store clerks. David had a decent understandin’
of Teneca’s language. When they encountered a phrase they weren’t able to work
through they’d ask their sons to help with the translation.
Teneca asked David to show him the farm. Daniel was pleased
to do so. The two older men spoke of plantin; an’ harvest. They talked of
cattle, horses an’ care of such. Teneca was curious about David’s mule. He had
encountered such but wasn’t sure why Daniel chose a mule over a horse.
David’s explanation was simple. It was the cost first of
all. Also, a mule was stronger in general an’ more sure footed in the
mountains. David saddled up the mule an’ suggested Teneca ride through the
hillsides to get a feel for the utility of a mule.
David went back to visit with the two sons as Teneca rode
for over an’ hour. When he rode back into the farm yard he was convinced. He
told his sons they would be findin’ a mule to purchase. Daniel had convinced
him of the value of them stubborn steeds.
“Teneca, they can be stubborn, hard headed.” David warned.
“Then my sons are also mules. They are hard in the head.”
Teneca laughed.
Selby pulled out all the stops for their dinner that noon
time. The three Choctaw men arrived early in the mornin’ for their visit. She
sliced off big slabs of ham in the smokehouse. A quick soak in a blend of water
an’ apple cider before fryin’ made that ham delicious. She boiled new taters,
chopped cabbage, onions an’ some peppers to make a quick vinegar an’ honey slaw.
She had leftover soup beans she warmed up on the back of the woodstove. Rather
than havin’ cornbread, she made a huge basket of biscuits.
Teneca realized Selby had gone all out for their dinner.
Though he weren’t fully familiar with their custom, he asked if he could say
the blessin’ over the food.
His blessin’ was thanksgivin’ for the bounty of friendship
as well as the overflowin’ table that sat before them. His sons had already
explained the tradition. When he finished, he said a hearty “Ah-mine”.
David an’ Selby repeated his “Ah-mine”.
The two families laughed, talked an’ ate. Teneca promised to
bring his wife the next time they came north. She weren’t much for travelin’
but he wanted her to know his new friends.
10.
Judah an’ Danny had been eleven an’ ten when the young
Choctaw braves first paused to eat David’s roastin’ ears by the river bank. Takoda
an’ Ahanu were sixteen an’ fourteen. At first the age difference seemed vast.
As the younger boys grew the age difference became less noticeable.
Though Danny an’ Judah learned to shoot their Daddy’s long
rifle, they didn’t have one of their own. David first took Judah an’ then Danny
with him when he hunted. Judah was eleven when he shot his first deer. Danny
shot a bear that broke into the hog lot when he was ten. The bear, a big,
healthy boar had grabbed one of the young pigs that was still with the ol’ sow
pig.
Danny ran in an’ grabbed the long rifle off the wall. They
all knew an unfamiliar bear had been roamin’ close to the cabin. Most of the
time black bears stayed well away from the homestead. This bear was young an’
new to the territory. It was, however, huge.
The piglet was squealin’ an’ carryin’ on when the bear
pushed through the log fence an’ grabbed it. The bear was shakin’ it like a rag
doll as it squealed. Most likely it knew the noise would alert the human
inhabitants.
It definitely did. As Danny ran out the door of the cabin,
he was pourin’ powder into the barrel of the rifle. A ball wrapped in a piece
of cloth was next. He quickly pushed the ramrod down to tamp down the ball an’
powder. He pulled back the mechanism an’ made sure the flint was sharp an’
ready as he primed the gun.
His Daddy would have had a fit if he was there. Danny knew
he had to get close. Through the rifle had a big bore, a 54 caliber was a fine
caliber rifle. Problem was, that was a big ol’ bear. He had to make the shot
just right. A poorly placed shot would wound the bear. That bear could drop the
pig an’ charge before Danny had opportunity to reload.
He stepped beside a sycamore tree that stood in the yard. He
leaned against it with his left arm an’ shoulder. That gave him a steady aim.
He waited for a moment, watchin’ for the right target.
At first the bear was facin’ directly away from Danny. The
bear shook the pig one more time an’ killed it. The bear then began to turn,
quarterin’ away from the sow who was standin’ in front of her other piglets by
that time.
There, just there was the target Danny was waitin’ for. Just
behind the front elbow of the bear’s leg. He aimed an’ fired. The smoke from
the black powder clouded his view for just a moment. He already had powder horn
in hand an’ was ready to load powder into the barrel. He’d already placed a
cloth wrapped lead ball between his teeth in anticipation of a second shot.
His Mama heard the shot an’ came around the cabin. She’d
been in back of the cabin with Danny’s little twin brothers. She shuddered an’
grabbed up the twins. She ran an’ pushed them inside the cabin, shuttin’ the
door on their squalls.
Selby hadn’t anything she might have done. She stood there
watchin’. Fearin’ for her second son. She needn’t fear. The scene was almost
over.
That big boar bear shook his head when the lead ball hit. It
dropped the piglet an’ turned to paw at the wound in its side. Then it dropped
over an’ moved no more.
David came runnin’ with Judah from up the hill. He stopped
when he saw Danny leaned up against the tree. He held out his arm to stop Judah
in his tracks.
“Reload boy. Finish reloadin’ an’ wait. Just because that
bear’s down don’t mean it is dead. Reload an’ wait.” Daniel said.
“Yes, Pap.” The reply.
David walked slowly to his son beside the sycamore tree. He
instructed Judah to go to the porch with his Mama. Selby went inside with the
twins once Judah was on the porch.
“Pap, it ain’t movin’. Should I shoot it again?” Danny
asked.
“No, son. Just wait. No sense in wastin’ good powder if it’s
truly dead.” Daniel’s answer.
They waited for several more minutes. There was no movement
from the bear. Eventually, Daniel took the long rifle from Danny an’ walked
close. He told Danny to wait an’ be ready to run.
The bear was dead. David turned to Danny. “Come on, son.
You’ve got a lot of work to do. We need to skin this bear, an’ get it nailed to
the side of the barn to cure. Need to salt the hams down, butcher the meat, put
a right smart amount of the meat in the smokehouse. Lot of meat there. We’ll
eat good for a long time with your bear.”
“Pap, I got my first harvest before Judah did. Ain’t that
right?” Danny asked.
David grinned. “Don’t know that this one counts the same
way, Junior. I’d not rub that in Judah’s face. World of difference in huntin’
for days to bring home a deer. He might decide to whup you good.”
11.
There was always some good natured joshin’ an’ one uppin’
between Judah an’ Danny. When Danny shot that bear, he decided it were time he
was called Daniel or Dan. Not Danny. Danny was a little boy name. He was a bear
hunter, after all.
It was the next fall before Danny, Dan finally shot a deer.
It actually was a way different story as his Daddy suggested. His first fall
after shootin’ the bear was a bust for him. He just didn’t have the patience to
sit an’ wait or slowly walk through the woods in a silent stalk. Deer didn’t
break into the pig pen an’ offer a clean shot.
That fall, when Takoda an’ Ahanu returned they brought gifts
for both of their friends. Durin’ the months before they each crafted a bow,
made from Osage orange for Judah an’ Daniel. Durin’ each of the past fall
visits the Carpenter boys practiced with the bows of their friends. They each
became proficient with the bow.
Takoda an’ Ahanu brought several arrows made with their own
hands for each of the younger boys. They also brought both flint an’ several
metal arrowheads along with feathers, gut an’ other supplies needed to teach
Judah an’ Daniel to make their own arrows.
They tarried several days. Each day David allowed his sons
to escape after doin’ their daily chores. They spent the rest of those days
workin’ with their Choctaw friends to make a full quiver of arrows. Ahanu was
skilled at usin’ birch bark to make quivers an’ baskets.
Now, normally the womenfolk made baskets. However, when
young men are sent out to make their own way, a rite of passage, they learned
skills that were needed for survival in the deep mountains. A cedar bark
bucket, tray or quiver were valuable tools in those manhood rituals.
The four collected birch bark an’ Ahanu showed the Carpenter
boys how to soak an’ then mold the quiver around a larger piece of wood. Thin
strips of hickory bark was soaked an’ used as lace to hod the birch bark
together.
Practice with the new bows happened constantly. Then the
gamesmanship happened. As Judah an’ Daniel became more skilled the four began
to challenge the other’s skills. Finally, David stepped in.
“I’m thinkin’ you boys, young men, braves need to go out an’
try to shoot somethin’ beside our punkins, gourds an’ them hedge apples. Why
not pack some supplies an’ take a huntin’ trip for a couple days.” He
suggested.
All four of the young men loved the idea. Selby provided
them with some basic food. Daniel wouldn’t allow her to give them too much. He
told them they needed to feed themselves. They asked if they could take the
mule. David gave in when Judah mentioned it would be difficult for the four of
them to drag back any big game.
Little did he know that Judah’s suggestion would be
prophetic.
12.
Takoda an’ Ahanu were cautious about the direction they four
should take. Judah suggested they follow the Clinch River eastward. He knew of
several places buffalo were known to still travel. Small buffalo herds were
still seen on occasion. The herds were not as abundant as they’d been just a
decade or two before.
Takoda told Judah it wasn’t wise to travel in that direction
any great distance. Though the Choctaw tribe had good relationships with
settlers, many settlements with newly arrived folks didn’t know the difference
in tribes. Attacks by Shawnee or other bands of hunters cause some settlements
farther east to be wary of any Indians.
Instead, they crossed the Clinch an’ went west an’ north.
Fewer settlements in that direction. Better huntin’ too.
Selby had provided enough basics for all four young men to
survive if they didn’t have a successful hunt. That weren’t a problem, however.
All four kept their eyes open for squirrel, rabbit an’ even the occasional
grouse. At the end of each day they had enough game hangin’ from their belts
an’ packs to eat well.
The mule was a steady companion. Their packs were hung on
the saddle so’s they could have hands free. The four young men took turns
walkin’ ahead of the others an’ the mule with bow in hand an’ arrow nocked. One
hunter, three walkin’ with the mule. A mule ain’t much when it comes to stealth.
The hunter would quietly slip through the forest. His eyes
seekin’ the movement in the trees or underbrush. The quick jump of a rabbit
would alert the hunter. He would pause, draw the bow back part way an’ wait.
With a little patience they would be rewarded as the rabbit relaxed an’ moved.
That was all it took. A quick aim an’ sure shot meant fresh
game roastin’ on a spit later in the evenin’.
Squirrels were easier to spot. They didn’t hide was they
passed. Instead, they would chatter an’ fuss at the intruders down below.
Daniel ended up bein’ the best shot when it came to squirrels. Though he
weren’t the most patient, he had a good eye an’ could shoot into the overhead
branches better than Takoda, Ahanu or his brother.
By this time in his life Danny was no longer Danny to anyone
but his parents. He explained to Ahanu he was now a great hunter, he did kill a
mauradin’ bear, after all. That heroic act was enough to launch him into
adulthood. That act alone secured his adult name of Daniel for all times.
Now an’ again Takoda would call him “Danny” to josh him a
bit. Each time Daniel would look right mean at his Choctaw friend. He then
would say “OK, Takody”.
Takoda would give him the evil eye right back.
That bit of joshin’ back an’ forth was goin’ on the third
day out. Daniel an’ Takoda were walkin’ on either side of the mule. Their
conversation was spoken in low tones so as not to stir up every critter in the
woods.
Judah had the lead. Ahanu was about twenty yards behind
Judah an’ about the same in front of the others an’ the mule. Ahanu saw Judah
raise his hand an’ motion for him to pause. He did the same as he turned an’
waved to the other two.
Their conversation stopped quickly.
Judah had a birch bark cone he’d made the year before. All
four boys took turns carryin’ that cone. As they traveled one or the other
would hold the cone to their lips an’ call through the cone. The call was a
high-pitched call that was almost like a whistle. Judah listened all through
his childhood to the matin’ calls of the elk that still roamed the hills in
Tennessee. He practiced for years as he tried to imitate that call.
By the time of this hunt, he could imitate that call easily.
As he paused, he let go of the bowstring with his right hand. The birch come
hung by a string on his back. He reached back an’ pulled it forward an’ to his
lips. He then imitated that high pitched call of the bull elk. He paused an’
called again. He looked back at Ahanu an’ with his head motioned Ahanu forward.
When Ahanu was close, he whispered, “Shake the bushes right
hard.”
Ahanu knew exactly what to do. A stag elk in full rut would
call again an’ again to challenge other bulls. They would thrash the trees an’
bushed with their great antlers as they challenged.
Ahanu picked up a stick an’ began to thrash an’ beat the
bushes an’ overhead limbs. Judah raised the birch cone to his lips an’ called
again.
Then, just above the two, maybe thirty feet away, a huge stag
elk came pushin’ out of a grove of cedar.
In a low tone, Ahanu whispered in Judah’s direction, “Wapiti”,
the commonly shared name for elk in most of the North American tribes.
13.
Thirty feet away made the stag too far away for a good shot.
Them Osage orange bows had incredible strength. There was no doubt that Judah
or Ahanu could hit a target at thirty feet. However, no good hunter would
attempt to make a killin’ shot on a huge elk at that range. Just weren’t viable.
Both young men stood still. Judah grunted softly. There was
a good-sized bush between them an’ the elk. Judah dropped the cone an’ it hung
from the string around his neck. He had an arrow between his fingers on his
left hand already. Usin’ the bush for cover, he nocked the arrow.
The two whispered back an’ forth. The stag stood still,
lookin’ from one side to the other. It didn’t see the two hunters. It was
lookin’ for the elk that challenged him.
Judah whispered, “Shake the bush a little.”
Ahanu took hold of a branch an’ carefully shook it. Judah
grunted once, twice.
The stag turned an’ looked in their direction. The hunters
stood still. The stag took one then two steps closer. With the side of them
long legs each step got the elk closer.
When that elk was about fifteen or sixteen feet away it
paused. Judah was quiverin. He had the bow facin’ downward but at full draw. He
was waitin’ for a chance to shoot. Any movement would alarm the stag an’ their
opportunity would be lost.
Ahanu also had an arrow nocked an’ ready. His bow was drawn
part way in the event there would be time for a second shot.
Then the elk decided the challenger had moved away. With no
concern it turned away an’ started to move to the left of the two hunters. That
was the chance Judah needed. He raised his bow, already at full draw. He
carefully sighted that spot just behind the front leg an’ let fly. The arrow
flew true, hit the side of the elk an’ disappeared completely. It reared up as
if to fly then ran.
Ahanu held his arrow at full draw as they watched the elk
run. Within just a moment they heard a crash. Then there was silence.
“Down, brother.” Ahanu said.
Judah grinned as he turned to Ahanu. That simple statement
meant a lot just then. He nodded an’ answered. “Down, brother.”
Ahanu held out his hand. Judah gripped Ahanu’s forearm in
their accustomed grip.
Ahanu repeated, “Down, brother.”
Judah had a huge smile on his face as he said, “Yes,
brother.”
Judah an’ Ahanu realized that moment changed who they were
to each other.
14.
Ahanu turned to face back down the trail an’ whistled.
Takoda whistled back. It took about two or three minutes for the other two to
catch up with the two hunters.
Daniel an’ Takoda had been far enough away that they didn’t
know exactly what had happened.
When the others were close, Ahanu said with a grin, “Wapiti.
Big Wapiti.”
Takoda spread his arms out an’ asked in English, “Big?”
Ahanu excitedly began to describe the hunt in his native
tongue to his brother. Judah an’ Daniel understood much of the conversation as
they’d been sharin’ language lessons back an’ forth with the two Choctaw men
for a number of years by this time. Judah grinned an’ interspersed the
conversation with added commentary an’ explanations for Daniel in English.
The four stood an’ waited with the mule for another twenty
minutes. They wanted to make sure the animal was down for good. Just good
advice the four all learned from their fathers.
They carefully approached the direction the elk went. They
saw the huge antlers first. The elk hadn’t run more than one hundred yards.
Judah an’ Ahanu approached slowly. Both had bows drawn. They needed to be sure
their prey was down.
The stag was massive. It would provide meat for many months
to come.
Judah looked at Ahanu an’ said, “There is plenty for us an’
for you to take back to your family.”
Ahanu tried to object.
Judah said, “I believe I’m now your older brother. We will
share this harvest, my brother.”
Ahanu shrugged, grinned an’ nodded. “Yes, we share.”
The others two walked close. Daniel tied the mule to a
nearby tree an’ approached. First Ahanu an’ then Judah explained the event that
took place after the kill.
“Brothers.” Ahanu said as he motioned back an’ forth between
himself an’ Judah.
Takoda nodded the pointed to all of the other young men. He
made a circle with his hand, pointin’ at each of them. “All brothers. Now.
Always.”
They each understood the solemnity of that moment. They all
nodded an’ repeated that unusual an’ profound statement.
“All brothers. Now. Always.”
15.
The four quickly decided that though the weather was cold,
they needed to process the meat an’ cool it quickly. The meat as well as the
hide would need to be processed back right quick. They began the long task of
processin’ the elk.
Skinnin’ took a right smart while. Ahanu took the task of
scrapin’ the hide to prepare it for transport. It would be rolled up with the
hair inward for travel.
Judah an’ Takoda took on the task of quarterin’ the carcass.
As they worked, they decided the meat would keep better if they could smoke it
at least a little while. They would need to process the meat into smaller
sections in order to allow the smoke to preserve the meat well. Large quarters
would not smoke enough for preservation. Daniel took their cue an’ used the
hatchet they brought to fell several long saplin’s.
He secured the saplin’s between the large limbs of three big
trees an’ then began to build a brush arbor. Once a saplin’ framework was in place,
he cut pine an’ cedar limbs. Those limbs covered the framework. The brush arbor
was soon enclosed.
With rope an’ vines nearby they hung the large portions from
the limbs of the three trees an’ several of the poles makin’ up the framework.
A firepit was dug an’ a fire was started inside the brush arbor. The fire was
kept goin with dead wood. However, green wood from nearby hickory trees was
constantly laid on the embers to keep a heavy smoke fillin’ the brush arbor.
Takoda noticed that a lot of the smoke was flowin’ from
their entrance. He an’ Judah discussed what to do. Then Ahanu had a brilliant
idea. He took up the hide an’ walked over to the entrance of the brush arbor.
He secured the hide with the hair outward. It completely covered the entrance
an’ several feet on either side of the openin’.
Takoda nodded. “Smoke with help cure the hide. Good.”
The four friends an’ brothers determined they needed to stay
put for a couple days while the meat smoked. It would be much easier to
transport it. There was also less chance of spoilage. The temporary smokehouse
brush arbor would also cure the hide well. It would be much easier to process
once they arrived back at the Carpenter homestead.
They knew there was the chance for bears, the occasional
wolf or even bobcats or panthers would smell the meat an’ perhaps find the
offal. That caused them to carry the innards an’ scraps to the stream an’ toss
it in a bit at a time. Judah wanted to keep the antlers. They were huge an’
would look good above the door of the barn.
They even scraped up the dirt that had scraps of fat an’
blood an’ threw that into the stream also. Ahanu noticed that the scraps thrown
into the stream attracted fish. He kept a small handful of scraps. He laid the
scraps by the smoky fire to save as bait the next day.
They laid a campfire nearby an’ lit it. Just to ward off
night time visitors, they laid cedar boughs on the fire. The cedar smoke would,
hopefully, conceal the smell of a fresh kill. They also determined to keep the
campfire an’ the smoke house fire goin’ through the next several nights.
16.
In the nearby area there was enough dry wood to keep the
campfire an’ the smoke house fire goin’. The four used the hatchet they had to
chop an’ cut green hickory sticks, branches an’ small saplin’s. Those was
thrown on the fire with regularity to keep the smoke goin’ right good.
Judah read a newspaper a while back. He’d learned to read
an’ write at home. His Mama was insistent on her youngin’s readin’ an’ writin.
An’ not just their names. She weren’t havin’ no heathen youngin’s.
Anyways, Judah read a newspaper. Found it over to a
settlement him an’ his Daddy traveled to. His Daddy weren’t much for spendin’
money on such. However, it was Judah’s money, scarce as it was. Judah bough
that newspaper an’ took it home. T
There was a story about hunters who protected their camp
with sticks stuck into the ground. Them sticks had fire hardened points. They
was all pointed outward from the camp. The story was about the bravery of them
hunters as they was attacked by a crazed panther.
When Judah told the other that story they all got to work
cuttin’ saplin’s an’ usin’ their knives to sharpen the point. Once the points
was sharpened the boys carefully heated the tips in the flames.
They dug holes into the ground an’ stuck the butt ends into
the holes. They pushed dirt back in an’ used other pieces of wood to beat the
dirt down an’ around the sticks.
The pointed sticks made a semicircle in front of the camp
fire. The brush arbor smoke house was behind. The four friends were well
protected in the encampment.
They took turns watchin’ both fires through the night. Ahanu
took the first watch. By mornin’ he’d had a good night’s sleep. As dawn grew
brighter the others rose an’ went about their individual routines. Ahanu stepped into the brush arbor an’ found
the bits of meat he set aside to fish with.
He already had a fishin’ pole made from a long limb of river
cane he found just down the bank about fifty yards. He pounded another piece of
river cane until it shredded. He then pulled long fibers from the cane. With
great care he tied three long fibers into a line about eighteen feet long. That
line he attached to the one end of the river cane pole.
The night before he found a patch of blackberry canes. He
carefully found a piece that had several barbed thorns close to one another. He
pinched an’ twisted those into a small ball with the thorns outward. That he
tied onto the end of the fiber fishin’ line. It was an old trick. Place bait
into the circle of thorns. The fish will try to swallow the bait an’ the thorns
will stick into the craw of the fish. It worked well.
“Gone fishin’” he told the others.
With rod an’ line in one hand an’ the handful of meat craps
in the other, he walked down to the stream bank. Along the way he cut a long stick
with a branch off to one side. He’d use that to push through the mouth an’
gills of the caught fish. He cut the side branch short. That would stop the
fish from slidin’ off the stick.
He sat down, baited the thorn ball an’ cast the line far
into the current. The water would push an’ bounce the bait along the stream
bottom.
17.
Ahanu sat quiet like. Not that it was necessary to be quiet
as he fished. It just felt good on that fall mornin’. Folks that fish often are
quiet, as if the fish could hear them. Perhaps the vibrations from movements on
shore could be felt by fish in a stream. Perhaps not.
He’d pushed the scraps an’ trimmin’s of meat an’ fat onto a
long twig the day before. Easier to keep up with. He left the bait ball in the
water for a right smart while before liftin’ it out to check it. The bait had
fallen off. Maybe them little ol’ minnows nibbled it all away.
He rebaited the thorn ball. Before he threw the line back in
he decided to take another tactic. He searched around an’ found a small piece
of twig. He tied that to the line about two feet above the thorn ball. The twig
would be buoyant an’ would keep the bait ball off the bottom.
Ahanu cast the line above his station. He watched it float
slowly downstream. Then, just then there was a ripple as the floatin’ twig
moved. There, it dipped just a mite. An’ again.
All of a sudden, the twig went under. He whooped an’ lifted
the fishin’ pole up quickly. A big ol’ smallmouth bass had the thorn ball
securely in its mouth. Ahanu spun around an’ dropped the fish behind him. He
knew better than to drop his catch down near the water. That thorn ball might
be released an’ his catch gone if it were neat the water.
He freed the fish, pushed the stick stringer through mouth
an’ gills an’ placed it in the shallow water. He pushed the end of the stick
into the bank so as not to allow his catch to get away. He quickly rebaited the
thorn ball an’ once again cast it upstream.
In the next fifteen minutes he caught another five fish.
Plenty for a good breakfast. He decided to keep on fishin’ for a few more
minutes. If he caught enough fish, he could hang them in their brush arbor
smoke house. A little salt on the fillets an’ a day or so smokin’ an they’d
have smoked fish for their trip back to the Carpenter homestead.
“Just wait till the others see that I’ve caught breakfast.”
He thought to himself.
The last fish he caught was huge. It was a large catfish. It
slapped the water as Ahanu lifted it out of the water.
18.
Don’t know if it were the noise or perhaps just their
presence.
The elk crashin’ through the underbrush could have been the
alert to his ears.
Might have been the smell of smoke up to the camp spot. The
cedar boughs thrown on the campfire were a strong odor that was hard to miss.
The fickle wind changed directions all that day. The wind pushed the aroma of
burnin’ cedar all up an’ down that little valley.
Might simply be the noise of the hunt that caught his
attention.
Could have even been the thrashin’ of them fish as they was
pulled out of the water.
The four young men weren’t exactly stealthy as they whooped
an’ cheered as they searched an’ found the elk. Their chatter as they went
about preparin’ the meat for smokin’ weren’t whispers.
There ain’t no way of tellin’ what caught the attention of
the watcher. No way of tellin’ when he arrived. He might have been there when
they found the elk layin’ in a bank of ferns.
He might have watched the whole scene from the beginnin’.
Just now though, he sat a ways back from the stream bank. Couldn’t
have been more than thirty, forty yards. He was hidden amongst the tall weeds.
Like Ahanu, he didn’t move much at all. He just sat an’ watched.
For now.
Just sat an’ watched.
19.
The watcher watched.
They four young men had no idea he was there. They had no
idea of the danger that lurked as they dressed the elk carcass. They were
ignorant to the danger they faced as they hung the elk an’ built that brush
arbor.
It would have been so easy to take down the single boy that
stood guard durin’ each watch.
Not yet. Not yet.
The cravin’ hadn’t grown. The hunger was still distant.
That mornin’ though. That mornin’ was different. His
constant hunger gnawed. It poked. It clawed.
As the watcher watched, the hunger, the pangs of need grew.
Time was almost up.
Time was …
Up.
The change in weather drove the watcher. Drove the watcher
hard. Instinct was takin’ over.
Caution was all but gone.
For some reason, the movement of boy an’ fish broke through
caution. Those movements, the sight of food turned off a switch in the watcher.
It was now. Now. Now.
Go. Go. Go.
Food, food, food. Kill it. Take it. Steal it.
No hesitation.
With an incredible burst of speed, the watcher, the lurker
burst out of the tall grasses.
The watcher crossed the distance in seconds. The Choctaw boy
had only a moment to turn, to see the watcher as it was quickly upon him.
Ahanu shrieked. He dropped the crude fishin’ pole. The fish,
still caught by the thorn bait ball fell in his lap. Ahanu held his hands out.
He tried to protect himself. It was no use. He was quickly overpowered.
He fought. He screamed curses in his native tongue. He
fought hard.
He was overpowered.
He didn’t really have a chance to win that battle. He cursed
an’ screamed as the watcher lashed out, cuttin’ his back deep as they battled.
It didn’t take long for his arms an’ his back to be cut deep as the two fought.
The watcher continued to attack. With the smell of the boy’s
blood, the bear realized the prize was no longer just the catfish in Ahanu’s
lap. The prizes were almost his. He wrapped one paw around Ahanu, breaking ribs
in the young man’s chest then reached an’ grabbed up the fish. It was huge. It
still wriggled an’ fought, still tryin’ to gain freedom. Ahanu fought to find
his own freedom.
Neither could escape.
20.
Daniel had bow in hand when he heard the cries from Ahanu.
He’d just left the campsite an’ was headed upstream to do a little rabbit
huntin’. A couple rabbits would be a good meal later in the day. When he heard
Ahanu cry out, he turned. He heard the noises of the battle an’ began to run
along the edge of the bank.
He was the first to arrive. When he saw the watcher, he
stopped. As He paused, he pulled an arrow out of his quiver an’ nocked it onto
the bow string. Problem was he couldn’t get a good shot.
Ahanu was still wrestlin’ for his life with a big ol’ bear.
The two were caught up in the fight. One for food, the other for his life.
Ahanu knew that bear could kill him quickly if he got hold of his head or neck.
He beat at the bear’s face an’ nose with both hands. He pushed the open jaws
away time an’ again in those few terrible seconds.
The bears hug paws slapped at Ahanu. Its claws tore at the
skin of his back. Ahanu didn’t realize the bear was after the fish. To him the
attack was aimed at his own self, not some fish, no matter how big that catfish
was.
Daniel hollered out to the others, “Bear, bear. Killin’
Ahanu. Help. Help.”
The other two were already alerted as soon as Ahanu began to
cry out. Both Takoda an’ Judah determined to leave bow behind. They both heard
the growls an’ grunts of that big ol’ bear. They knew the battle was a close
quarter fight.
With one accord the two stepped to the long fire sharpened
sticks they stuck in the ground. With herculean effort they both pulled a
weapon out of the pounded dirt. They looked into each other’s eyes for a second
as they turned an’ began to run to the sound of Ahanu cryin’ out.
They heard Daniel’s cries for help as they ran. That cry
scared both young men. They knew Daniel had his bow. The realized that since he
cried for help, he was unable to shoot. That only meant one thing.
That bear was upon Ahanu an’ Danile had no shot.
An all they had were two long hickory saplin’s with fire
sharpened points.
They did not hesitate. They did not pause to consider their
own safety. They ran to the battle an’ began to attack the bear with the stakes
that quickly became spears. They saw Daniel standin’ above the fight with bow
drawn. He was waitin’, hopin’ for just one chance to shoot.
They all suspected that shot might never come.
Takoda an’ Judah struck in unison. The bear was turned away
from the two. Their spears struck an’ sank deep. They both knew they had to
strike high. No sense in hittin’ low an’ stickin’ the fat belly. They both was
tryin’ to strike a mortal blow. That was the only chance they had of killin’
their foe.
Judah’s first blow sank deep. It weren’t a mortal blow.
Takoda struck an’ hit bone. Still not a mortal blow. Judah struggled to pull
his spear out. Takoda’s came out quickly. He struck again an’ again. Judah
pulled his shaft from the bear an’ struck once more.
That huge bear was furious. It turned an’ saw the attackers.
That was lucky for Ahanu. The attack was aimed away from him an’ the bear’s
original prey. The bear rose to full height. It was massive an’ stood above the
two heroic brothers. It roared an’ swatted at the two.
It was just then, when it stood to full height that Daniel
understood he may never get a good shot with his bow. Instead, he grabbed the
nocked arrow. He dropped the bow an’ retrieved another arrow. He had an arrow
in both hands as he ran close.
Judah an’ Takoda no longer feared for Ahanu alone. They
understood all their lives were at stake. They stepped close an’ both tried to
sink their weapons into the bear’s chest.
“Low an’ up, my brother. Under the ribs.” Takoda cried.
As the struggled to spear a mortal spot they saw Daniel jump
onto the bear’s back. He had arrows in both hands an’ began to plunge the
arrows into the back of the bear again an’ again. That infuriated the monster.
It turned an’ tried to slap Daniel off.
It reached an’ got purchase on Daniel’s leg with its jaws.
It shook its head an’ threw Daniel to the side of Ahanu. It was at that moment
that Ahanu took hold of the knife in his belt. Daniel stood. Ahanu reached out
to take the arm of Daniel. Daniel helped him rise an’ together they attacked
the bear’s back.
At the same time Judah an’ Takoda renewed their attack.
Their spears were pushed upward an’ deep. The bear swiped an’ clawed. It didn’t
fear the puny boys that fought to same one of their own.
That was a mistake. Them young men, them boys already
determined to be brothers, not by birth but by choice. Nothin’ was goin’ to
deter them. They all were wounded. They all would bear the scars, the medals of
that day’s valor for the rest of their lives.
They was never sure which blow was the killin’ blow. The
bear fought, wounded all four. Ahanu received the worst of the wounds. The
others were hurt but fought hard. One of Daniel’s arrows stuck deep into the
fat of the bear an’ could not be retrieved. Ahanu stabbed an’ stabbed till he
fell. He just didn’t have the strength to continue.
It was just after he fell to the ground that the bear
succumbed to the many wounds. It howled, growled an’ slumped to the ground. It
finally lay dead, surrounded by four young warriors.
21.
The others all fell to the ground. They were all scratched,
clawed, bit an’ wounded. The blood of the bear covered all of them. They sat
without sayin’ anything for ever so long. They was just exhausted. Yes, they
was victorious.
All of them paid a price.
They would all bear battle scars. Ahanu bore the brunt of the
attack. He was torn an’ clawed all over his back an’ shoulders. His forearms
also were bloody where he fended off the great bear’s advance. He’d been
swatted, squeezed an’ beaten by the hungry bear.
It was Judah that spoke to the others. He rose, unsteady on
his feet.
“Fellers, my brothers, we need to get over to that stream
an’ wash ourselves. Ahanu. We especially need to cleanse your wounds. Daddy
told me long ago that the claws of bears, wolves, panthers an’ such are bad for
causin’ infections an’ so on. I have to say it, but we all need to wash off the
blood an’ clean our cuts, bites an’ wounds.”
Daniel was up next. He turned an’ staggered away.
“I’ll go get our lye soap Mama sent. She gave me a big ol’
bar. Said we needed to wash up if we field dressed any game. Said it weren’t
clean to eat with dirty hands an’ all. It is sure to hurt, but we gotta do it.”
He said.
Takoda crawled next to his brother. He spoke in their
language, urgin’ Ahanu to sit up an’ turn so he could examine the wounds Ahanu
received. Judah joined him, kneelin’ an’ helpin’ Takoda help Ahanu to a sittin’
position.
When they turned Ahanu away, they could see the damage to
his back. They both were silent. Takoda’s eyes became watery but he shook his
head to let Judah know not to say much. Ahanu’s moans an’ answers told them he
had several broken ribs.
“Brother Judah, we need to get Ahanu to the water an’ bathe
him. We need to cleanse the wounds. When Daniel is back with the lye soap you
an’ Daniel must wash Ahanu. I need to begin to skin the bear.” Takoda said.
Ahanu looked around. He weas puzzled. “Why do you skin the
bear, brother?”
Takoda placed his hand on his brother’s hand. “I need to
render fat. We need much rendered fat. When we get you to campsite, we find
pine pitch. Judah, need to find much pine pitch. I will make a poultice for your
wounds. Maybe ours if I render enough. You are wounded much bad, Ahanu.”
22.
Judah an’ Daniel helped Ahanu up the creek band several
yards above the site where the bear attacked. The water was deeper an’ was
swift. They wanted the water to be as clean as possible. Like all hunters an’
those who wandered the wilds, they knew swift water was cleaner than still
waters.
Ahanu struggled to remain quiet. His usual way was to not
show fear or pain. It was the way of the warrior. It was the way of a man.
Problem was the broken ribs hurt with every step. His wounds
continued to bleed as they half carried him along the bank. When they found a
spot with swift water an’ a gentle incline they stepped into the water
carefully. Judah didn’t want to lose footin’ an’ fall with their Choctaw
brother.
They waded out with Ahanu till the water was just above
their waists. As Judah held Ahanu, Daniel carefully took off the shreds of his
buckskin vest an’ shirt that was underneath. Judah told him to step to the band
an’ lay the clothin’ there. They would need the shirt to make bandages an’
compresses.
Once Ahanu’s wounds were fully cleansed, they helped him out
of the water an’ carried him to the campsite. He fell to the ground an’ lay on
the small piece of buffalo hide he brought along on their journey. Judah turned
him to lay on his back. He took off his shirt an’ began to apply pressure to
the wounds that were still bleedin’.
“Daniel, find some walnuts still in husk. I saw a walnut
tree down the path we took. Find yarrow too. I need yarrow to staunch the
bleedin’. We need to crush the walnut husks. That’ll help keep his wounds from
gettin’ infection. He’s all torn up, Danny. We need to get his bleedin’ stopped
so’s Takoda can have time to make that poultice.”
The three young men worked hard to get Ahanu stabilized.
Daniel crushed the yarrow he found an’ made a paste. Judah applied that paste
to all the wounds that was still bleedin’. He noticed Daniel an’ Takoda also
had open wounds that still dripped blood. He sent Daniel back to harvest more
yarrow.
“We need to all be careful not to fall ill because we didn’t
get our wounds clean.” He explained.
Takoda took the one pot they had an’ laid a mound of bear
fat into it. He’d taken time to wash the fat after he cut it out. The embers of
the mornin’s fire were still glowin’ when he placed the pot on them. He
carefully added twigs to the fire. He didn’t want the fat to burn. He needed it
to render.
Judah an’ Daniel found several hands full of pine pitch.
They went from pine tree to pine tree to pull the lumps of pitch from the bark.
Those lumps of pitch were laid on a piece of bark beside the fire.
Judah pounded the walnut husks between rocks till the husks
were pulverized. He took hands full of the ground husks an’ squeezed over
Ahanu’s wounds till the oils dripped into each gash. It was tedious work. His
hands ached as he squeezed. Both hands were stained a dark brown from the
walnut husks. Daniel joined him to continue to squeeze the precious husk oils
into Ahanu’s wounds.
As Takoda waited, he too joined the others to mash more
husks an’ squeezed the precious drops of oil into Ahanu’s wounds.
Eventually, Daniel went back to the stream bank an’
collected Ahanu’s shirt, leggings, breechcloth an’ vest. He stepped into the
water to wash the shirt with the lye soap. He took off his shirt an’ britches
an’ washed them well also. When he realized how bloody an’ foul his clothin’
was he went back to the camp.
“I need y’all to give me your clothes. They need to be
washed. We all are foul from the fight with that bear. We need to clean our
wounds. Takoda, I should try to wash your buckskin vest an’ breechcloth as well
as your leggin’s some too. It’s all covered in blood an’ such. We don’t want to
get sick. Don’t need to drop such on Ahanu as we care for him.” He said.
The others stripped off all their clothin’ an’ handed it to
Daniel. Ahanu was already stripped of his torn an’ bloody things as they cared
for his wounds. Daniel went to the water an’ carefully washed all the clothin’.
He eventually came back to the camp with an armful of wet duds.
He took the clothes into the temporary smoke house an’ hung
everything close to the central fire. The heat of the smokehouse would dry
their clothes quicker than simply hangin’ things on tree limbs. They all felt
vulnerable as they went about the things they needed to do.
Ahanu spoke, “My brothers. You save meat from bear. We
fought hard. He was courageous. We not waste the meat. Plenty of meat for
winter.”
The others tried to argue but Ahanu was insistent. They gave
in. Takoda an’ Daniel went to finish the process of butcherin’ the bear. Daniel
had experience as he already assisted his Daddy when he shot that mauradin’
bear in their pig pen.
23.
As the other three ministered to Ahanu, they became more an’
more concerned. He was in terrible shape. His back an’ shoulders were covered
in long gashes an’ bites from the bear’s attack. His broken ribs made any
movement agony.
The yarrow had mostly staunched the bleedin’. Now an’ again
as Ahanu moved, blood would seep out once again.
Takoda began to drop pieces of the pine pitch into the rendered
bear fat. He needed the pitch to melt slowly an’ combine with the rendered fat
to make a thick salve. The plan was to slather that salve into the many bites
an’ gashed coverin’ Ahanu’s back, shoulders, buttocks an’ arms.
It was late evenin’ by the time the rendered fat an’ pine
pitch was cooled enough to use. Takoda used his knife earlier to carve out
several long flat pine implements, much like spatulas. He used those to spread
the thick salve.
“This will help muchly. This will stop blood. This will help
heal. But my brother is bad. I am worried.” He told the other two young men.
There were about six years difference in the ages of the
Choctaw men an’ the Carpenters. By this time in their lives there wasn’t much
difference in their body size. Judah an’ Daniel were a little taller than their
Choctaw brethren. Takoda an’ Ahanu were not as lean an’ lanky as the two
younger boys.
Judah insisted they also care for their wounds. Each had
wounds that were deep an’ would leave scars on their bodies for the rest of
their lives. None of their scars were life threatenin’. Judah was greatly
concerned for Ahanu. He was severely wounded.
Ahanu tried to put on a brave face, a false front. The
others knew him well enough to know he was endurin’ great pain.
Daniel found a stand of willow trees down the way about two
hundred yards or so. With his knife he cut off long strips of bark. He took
those back to the camp. With care he helped Takoda put the remainder of the
salve onto a flat piece of pine bark. He went to the stream with the pot an’
washed it carefully with the bar of lye soap.
Once the pot was clean an’ free of residue he filled it with
water. He returned an’ put the pot on the embers of their campfire. Once the
water was heated to a simmer, he threw in pieces of the willow bark. Like most
who lived in the wilderness, they all knew willow bark made a healin’ tea that
relieved pain.
Daniel had a cone of dark brown sugar in his pack. Once the
tea steeped for a bit, he used his knife to scrape off sugar into the pot. They
all had tin cups in their packs. He found Ahanu’s cup an’ filled it. Daniel let
the tea cool just long enough to allow Ahanu to drink it.
Ahanu was awake when Daniel approached. He told Daniel he
wasn’t hungry when he approached. Daniel explained it was willow bark tea.
Ahanu nodded but didn’t drink. Takoda stepped close an’ spoke to Ahanu in their
native tongue.
Daniel understood enough to know Takoda said he was indeed
the second stubborn mule on their trip. Ahanu laughed, coughed an’ nodded. He
took the cup into his hand an’ slowly sipped the tea. Daniel sat bedside Ahanu
till all the tea was gone.
Judah poured the rest of the tea into a tin canteen he
brought along. They hadn’t needed the canteen often as they traveled since
there was plenty of water in the streams they followed. They all had their tin
cups to drink from.
Once Ahanu finished the tea he fell into a troubled sleep.
24.
Judah checked an’ found their clothes to be dry. He the
smell of smoke permeated the clothes but they were clean an’ dry. After a few
minutes conversation the three decided to use their shirts an’ any piece of
cloth to bind Ahanu’s wounds.
Takoda an’ Judah made breech cloths for Judah an’ Daniel.
They cut all four of their shirts into strips to bandage Ahanu’s wounds. They
also cut Judah an’ Daniel’s breeches into long strips. The three could travel
wearin’ the breechcloths.
Ahanu was restless all night long. Though the three took
turns watchin’ over Ahanu an’ guardin’ the camp, none got much sleep throughout
the night.
Durin’ the night they all saw the glow of eyes lookin’ into
the camp. Most of the time they recognized the eyes as those of deer, coons,
even possums.
About 2:00 in the mornin’ Takoda saw a pair of eyes deep in
the woods. Those eyes peered long an’ hard into the guarded encampment. He
suspected it was a bobcat. He decided to tell Judah when he took his turn at
watch.
Though Judah looked deep into the darkness durin’ his watch,
he didn’t see the predator’s eyes. Neither he nor Takoda were concerned. A
bobcat might be curious but it weren’t a threat.
In the pre-dawn the three were up an’ movin’.
Judah cut strips of meat from the elk shoulders in the brush
arbor smoke house. He cut long sticks an’ skewered the meat. They’d already
made a makeshift rack over the fire. He hung the skewers over the fire for a
few minutes to make sure the meat was thoroughly cooked. Once he took the
skewers of meat off the rack, he offered the other two men some salt from his
small leather bag he carried in his pack.
They sat around the fire an’ ate in silence. They all had
the same thoughts on their mind. They all knew that they had to make a serious
decision once full daylight came.
Takoda spoke what the other two thought. “My brother is not
well. He struggles an’ is tryin’. He is not well. We must take him back. Must
return to your home, my brothers. Today. We can get there before night. We must
go.”
There was no question. There was no disagreement. The other
two quickly agreed. Ahanu must get back. He was worse. Though his wounds were
cleansed an’ they kept applyin’ the salve, they feared it might not be enough.
The three made the decision to abandon the camp once there
was enough daylight. They began to move quietly in the near dawn to pack up.
Takoda told the other two he would make a travois to tie to the mule as soon as
he could see to cut long enough saplin’s. they would be able to use their
blankets an’ the skins from the elk an’ bear to create a cradle on the travois
to carry Ahanu.
They would also need to abandon all the meat except enough
to see them back to the Carpenter homestead.
25.
Takoda, Judah an’ Daniel made plans to abandon the camp, the
brush arbor smoke house an’ all the meat. Their minds were on their brother,
Ahanu. They needed to get him back to the carpenter place. There he could be
cared for. There someone would go for Teneca, Ahanu an’ Takoda’s father.
Ahanu was showin’ signs that distressed the others. They’d
cleansed his wounds an’ cared for them as best they could. They feared their
ministrations weren’t enough.
As they spoke in low tones, they didn’t realize that Ahanu
was wakin’. He heard their plans an’ saw their activities. He pushed up on one
elbow an’ called out. The three heard him an’ went to him.
“No. you cannot leave the elk. You must not leave my bear.
His skull will go with us. His hide will keep me warm when I am an old man. We
cannot leave much meat. No, my brothers. We cannot leave the meat.” He said in
a weak voice.
They hadn’t planned on keepin’ the skull. It was layin’
inside the smoke house but had bene forgotten. Ahanu told them early on that he
wanted the skull an’ hide.
He argues with them as he lay back down on his belly. He
would not go if they abandoned the meat. Takoda said he didn’t have a choice.
Ahanu reminded his older brother that he was a man, not a boy. He would make
his own decisions.
The finally determined to follow Ahanu’s request. As they
discussed their options, they decided that Takoda an’ Daniel would stay behind
an’ care for their harvest. It was a good decision in many ways. There would be
much meat for both families.
Takoda an’ Judah worked together to cut saplin’s an’ make
the travois. Though the mule hadn’t been hitched to a travois, it had pulled
plows an’ sleds. Thought it could be stubborn, it was almost a pet to Judah. He
had no trouble tyin’ the long poles an’ securin’ them to the mule.
They used long vines an’ saplin’s to make cross pieces for
the two long poles that would crisscross the mule’s back. The ends would drag
on the ground behind the mule. The cross pieces would form a base for the
blankets an’ hides. They secured those far enough apart to allow Ahanu to lay
within a pocket of comfort. If there would be any comfort as they traveled
back.
The three carefully lifted Ahanu an’ laid him in the cradle
of the travois. Because of his wounds he had to lay on his side. Even that
caused him great pain. Daniel gave him the canteen filled with willow bark tea.
He instructed his friend an’ brother to drink often to ease the pain.
The three men standin’ gripped forearms as they often did in
greetin’ an’ goodbyes. They also gripped Ahanu’s forearm as they said their
farewells. Then, though they were all men, tears welled up in their eyes.
It was a risky journey. Though it was only a day’s journey,
it would be long an’ hard. Judah would take Ahanu home. Takoda an’ Daniel would
remain an’ care for the meat. Judah would return with help to carry the meat
back home.
26.
Takoda an’ Daniel kept the fire fed in the brush arbor smoke
house. Aged hickory was the base for the embers that burned slowly. Those were
kept goin’ with larger pieces of hickory they collected around the camp site.
The hatchet helped chop the larger pieces into manageable logs.
Over those embers were twigs, branches an’ green wood from
the hickory trees nearby. They both yearned for a good ol’ apple tree or even a
crabapple as they watched the smoke drift up through the brushy cover of their
improvised smoke house.
As they sat an’ watched over the fires in both the smoke
house an’ their campsite they talked. Over the past several years they both
learned much of the other’s language. A few times they searched for the right
words. Mostly they were able to talk with no attempt at translatin’ their
thoughts.
They spoke of the meat in the smoke house. Durin’ the day
Daniel cut more strips of the elk meat that they roasted on green wood skewers.
Alter in the day, toward evenin’ they determined to get some sort of revenge by
roastin’ pieces of bear meat from the hams of that marauder. They both agreed
that bear meat was actually very tasty. It had more fat than the elk did.
They expected Judah to arrive at the Carpenter homeplace by
dark. Judah was determined to continue even if they were caught by the
twilight. He knew, as they did, that Ahanu’s life was at risk if infection set
in.
They knew that the trip would be a strain on Ahanu as the
travois bumped an’ drug over the uneven ground.
They were not concerned for Judah’s woods skills. He knew
that country well. The path they took was a familiar buffalo trace. Their only
concern was not that the two other men come across predatory animals. They
feared the two-legged predators that might be in the path of their brothers.
They expected their combined families to come to join them
an’ help transport the harvested meat in two days’ time. That gave them time to
sit an’ talk, time to contemplate. Time to grow even closer in their new
brotherhood.
Takoda approached an issue that was on the minds of many
colonists wherever they lived.
“Daniel, I am told that someday your leaders will fight your
great chief over the waters. We know the red jacket soldiers. They have great
weapons. They are many in number. Why do men want to fight your great king,
your chief?” Takoda asked.
Daniel was quiet for a long time. Takoda could tell he was
deep in thought. Daniel searched for answers that a teenage boy didn’t have a
good grasp on.
Finally, he said, “My brother, I don’t know all the answers
to that question. I do know some is about the things the soldiers can do. They
can do whatever they please. Daddy told me that. He told me if they come an’
want anything we have to let them have it. They are allowed by the king’s
decrees, his laws, I reckon.”
“That is stealin’, Daniel. That is wrong. Even out chiefs
would not allow that.” Takoda said.
“I know, Takoda. It’s more than that. Daddy says us folks
that live here shouldn’t be beholden to some ol man sittin’ in a palace over
the sea somewhere. I don’t even know where that is. Why should he tell us what
to do? Daddy says it’s more. It’s about freedom an’ such. The right of a man to
be free.” Daniel explained.
Takoda was quiet for a long time after that. “Freedom. That
is a difficult thing, my young brother. I don’t know that your leaders see the
same freedoms for you an’ me. I don’t know that we will ever have that.”
“That ain’t right. Ain’t right at all. Don’t know why that
is. Me an’ you ain’t no different. Why, when I’m out workin’ all summer folks
probably couldn’t tell us apart when I’m all brown from the sun. Our hair is
the only thing that would set us apart. Maybe we shave our heads an’ they’d not
know at all.” Daniel exclaimed.
“My brother, you an’ me are ugly enough with hair.” Takoda
replied.
They laughed at that thought.
Takoda got serious an’ asked, “If they fight, will you
father fight? Will you an’ your brothers?”
“If we fight, we fight together.” Was Daniel’s reply.
27.
Two days later Daniel was sittin’ close to the camp fire.
Takoda was at the creek an’ was bathin’. They didn’t have much to do for the
last several days. Truth be told, Takoda was doin’ more swimmin’ than bathin’.
Daniel’s ears perked up. He heard the sound of voices in the
distance. He paused to listen. Yes, there it was again. Though the voices were
low, he could tell it definitely was human voices.
He rose an’ walked quickly toward the creek. Though they
expected their families, they had to make sure they were safe if others
appeared along the buffalo trace. It was not unusual from many tribes to travel
the traces. It wasn’t unusual for settlers to use the same paths.
“Takoda, someone is comin’.” He whispered.
“Our people?” Takoda whispered back.
Daniel shook his head, “Don’t know. I can hear voices now
an’ again. Talkin’ right low. Don’t know if they are our folks. Don’t know,
Takoda.”
Takoda climbed up out of the water an’ quickly secured his
breech cloth. Both young men had sacrificed most of their clothin’ to make
bandages an’ to bind Ahanu’s wounds.
Takoda decided they needed to take a defensive position. In
the event those followin’ the buffalo trace were not their folks, they needed
to defend themselves an’ protect their meat. The sheer volume of meat they was
smokin’ would be temptin’ to less than scrupulous men.
They both found an’ took up their bows. Takoda sent Daniel
behind the brush arbor. He was to kneel in the tall sweet grasses an’ watch.
Takoda kicked dirt over their camp fire an’ went into the brush to the right of
the buffalo trace. The camp was on the left with the creek below.
They both stuck the points of several arrows into the dirt
just in front of their position. They also nocked an arrow on their bowstrings.
They sat real quiet like, waitin’.
As they listened, they both realized there were several
approachin’. It weren’t just two folks. An’ there was the sound of a wagon or
sled travelin’ along the path.
Takoda had the better view. He stood behind an oak tree.
There was a short bush just in front of him that allowed him to stand an’ watch
the path. He hoped that it was family. He feared who else might be travelin’
that path. He especially feared the chances of other tribes not so friendly to
the Choctaw bein’ on that path.
Daniel was kneelin’ just behind the edge of the brush arbor.
He had a good view of the path. Takoda had the longer view. He too was
carefully watchin’. He was shakin’ in anticipation. There was always that
chance of strangers comin’ up on them. The encounter with the bear made him
especially nervous.
Now an' again they heard voices. It took a moment, but they
recognized the voices of their fathers.
28.
Though Takoda an’ Daniel knew it was family headin’ their
way, they had both determined to stay in place an’ melt into the forest around
them. They would see just how stealthy they could be. Good practice.
Takoda was in the tall grasses to one side of the buffalo
trace. Daniel knelt in the bushes just behind the brush arbor smoke house.
They watched the path for several minutes. Finally, they
both saw their fathers, David Carpenter an’ Teneca.
Teneca was first along the path. He led a pack horse.
Takoda’s Uncle Nashoba, which means “wolf” was with him an’ led another pack
horse. David Carpenter was just behind them. He led his ox pullin’ a sled.
Takoda an’ Daniel both snickered under their breath. Though
they were not children, they enjoyed the fact that they hid from their fathers.
When the travelers came into the camp area, Teneca paused.
He looked around for just a moment. David did the same.
The two elder men just stood there.
After a moment Teneca nodded in Takoda’s direction. “Your
scent gave you away. Your movement was minimal but obvious. You may come out
now, my son.”
He turned in the direction of Daniel. “Young Daniel, you
must be more cautious with your breath control. I heard you breathin’ yards
away. Your skin was obvious through the brush you are behind.”
David laughed. “Boys, even I knew where you were an’ I’m not
the hunter an’ tracker Teneca is. Good job, though. Many would never know you
were there.”
Both young men stepped out from their hidin’ places. They
both grinned sheepishly.
Takoda’s Uncle, Nashoba was grinnin’. He didn’t comment on
their hidin’ spots. Both young men knew that Nashoba was an even better tracker
than Teneca.
David spoke, “Better let us see the elk an’ bear meat. Need
to see if we need to work the meat more.
The three older men followed Takoda into the brush arbor
smoke house. The filtered light allowed them to see all the pieces of meat
hangin’ in the arbor. Takoda an’ Daniel explained all they did to prepare the
meat.
The elder men were impressed. They asked about the hunt, the
stalk an’ the kill. Daniel an’ Takoda recounted the story excitedly. The three
older men became quiet as the story unfolded. It was a moment in time that
happened hundreds, thousands of times throughout history. The telling caused
the listeners to almost become hypnotized as they listened.
Finally, they finished. Nashoba nodded an’ clapped each of
the younger men on the shoulder. “Good. You will tell that story many times in
your lives. Good.”
Then David asked if they could examine the meat.
They went from one piece of meat to another. The three
nodded an’ spoke quietly to one another.
Nashoba lifted several of the larger pieces of meat an’
smelled it. He nodded. “Is fine. Not done yet but is fine.”
He turned to the other men. “We salt it now. Will cure
faster.”
They had several bags of salt hangin’ from the pack horse.
Takoda went to the horse an’ brought them back. They quickly cut a number of
saplin’s to create a long makeshift table inside the smoke house.
When the table was complete Nashoba took larger pieces of
meat down an’ laid them on the table. With deft skill he used his knife to cut
the hunks of meat into flat pieces, almost like filets. He carefully rubbed
salt into the meat with his hands. Once each piece of meat was well salted, he
rubbed ground black pepper into the meat.
Daniel said, “That’s lots of pepper.”
He knew pepper was relatively rare.
Nashoba nodded an’ looked to Daniel. “Yes. Pepper keeps
flies an’ insects from blowin’ the meat, layin’ eggs
When he was done, he had the top of the table covered with
the fileted elk an’ bear meat. He looked at the meat an’ nodded.
“Now we wait. Need to cut more green wood. Salt with draw
out more water. Smoke an’ heat will finish.” He said.
29.
It would have been easy for the older men to take over. The
three had many years of experience in the wilderness. The mountains had been
their home, their huntin’ grounds, their playground when they was youngin’s.
All three knew the area the younger men were campin’ in. Not
one of them let on. They understood there had been a moment in time that
changed the two warriors that stepped out of the woods when they arrived.
No sense in lettin’ that moment fade.
Nashoba took the lead as they worked with the meat. He was
the most experienced. He did not, however, try to play down their efforts. He
was gracious an’ complimented them on their efforts.
All three of the elders were impressed by the brush arbor
smoke house. Once the meat was processed, they took a tour of the brush arbor.
Teneca examined it closely. “Is good.”
Takoda asked his uncle how much longer they needed to stay
in place to make sure the meat wouldn’t spoil as they traveled. Nashoba thought
for a moment an’ suggested they should wait two days before packin’ the meat up
an’ transportin’ it.
“We rest. We wait. Just enjoy time here, Takoda. There’s
much meat. We can’t let it ruin. We wait maybe two, three more days.” He
replied.
Teneca an’ David knew what was on their son’s minds. No one
had asked yet.
David sat on the ground an’ motioned to the younger men to
join him. Teneca an’ Nashoba sat on either side of the younger men.
“Ahanu is bein’ cared for. Teneca’s family all came to our
place when I went for Teneca. Daniel, your mama, Ahanu’s mama an’ grandma are
carin’ for him. They already have cleaned up Judah’s wounds. He’ll have scars
from the battle. Ahanu will be badly scarred but they think he’ll survive. He
was unconscious when we left. He had a fever. That ol’ bear’s claws infected
his wounds. Judah’s wounds was right ugly too. Your Mamas sent medicine an’
whiskey to clean your wounds better. We have salves to put on your wounds.” David
told them.
Teneca added, “You both have gashes on your shoulders that need
cleansin’. They are bad even now. We need to tend them now or you too will fall
sick.”
Both young men tried to argue. Neither had an effective
argument.
Though they’d both scrubbed their wounds with the bar of lye
soap, the deep gashes were not closin’ as they should. Teneca went with them to
the stream an’ after removin’ his clothin’ he commenced to scrubbin’ the open
wounds of both young men. Though the scrubbin’ was intense an’ rough, neither
said a word.
They did flinch now an’ again.
It was the way of the warrior.
Teneca grinned to himself as he worked on the wounds. He
knew the scrubbin’ was painful. He also knew both young men would rather face
that mauradin’ bear again than make a sound.
There was no easy way to close the wounds. They would become
scars as they healed. All four of the young men would bear the scars from the
attack. What they could do was bind the wounds to push the edges together so as
to heal.
Teneca an’ David both brought fresh clothin’ for their
sons. After the wounds were cleansed an’
dealt with both young men dressed in fresh clothin’.
While all that was goin’ on Nashoba found the thorn ball,
line an’ river cane fishin’ rod Ahanu made before the bear attack. He took the
rod an’ walked upstream. As he walked, he looked at the ground an’ the bushes
carefully. Now an’ again he plucked an insect off a limb an’ held it in his
hand.
Later he was back with four good sized small mouth bass. “We
eat fish today.”
30.
The five men all were quiet as the sun set. After a supper
of fish, they sat on the ground around the camp fire. Earlier they made sure to
have plenty of green hickory to keep the smoke goin’ through the night. David
had the foresight to bring an’ ax. That allowed them to cut plenty of firewood
for the smoke house an’ the campfire.
Nashoba an’ David were deep in conversation just before the
men all settled down for the night. Nashoba asked to take the first watch.
David was to take the watch just before dawn.
They explained that they would be leavin’ at dawn to hunt.
David had his flintlock along. Nashoba had his bow. He also took a likin’ to
the fire sharpened “accidental” spears the younger men made. He worked one over
with his knife, smoothin’ out the length of the spear. He made the point
sharper an’ did another heat treatment on the point. When he was done, he felt
the point, looked at it closely an’ nodded.
David knew those woods well. The place where they were was
only a day’s walk from the Carpenter homestead. He’d hunted that area for many
years. The buffalo trace was a super highway for many animals. David an’
Nashoba decided to take advantage of that path an’ hunt.
There weren’t much need for all four men to sit an’ tend the
brush arbor smoke house. Teneca, Takoda an’ Daniel were happy to stay behind.
Though he would never admit it out loud, Teneca was worried about his son,
Ahanu.
Nashoba was up well before dawn. He rose an’ stepped close
to David. With a nod he greeted the other man. David rose an’ walked over to
Daniel. He leaned over to gently shake his son awake.
“Danny, son. Time to rise. Me an’ Nashoba are headin’ out.
We’ll take the pack horse. Make sure to take my ox down to drink when y’all
start movin’ about.” David said quietly.
There weren’t much need to whisper. Teneca was already up as
soon as he heard the other men movin’ about. They said a few words of mornin’
greetin’ an’ David reminded Teneca of the direction they would take.
Nashoba was in the smoke house an’ returned with several
pieces of elk meat that had been placed closer to the fire. It had dried into
some fine jerky they would take along on the hunt. They filled their canteens
from the creek, made sure the provisions an’ David’s saddlebags was secure an’
walked into the night.
Teneca, Tacoda an’ Daniel kept a wary eye out throughout the
day. They still had the memory of the bear attack in the forefront of their
mind. Teneca weren’t as concerned since the meat was smoked an’ salted by that
time. The smell of fresh blood an’ meat weren’t in the air to attract bears or
panthers.
Teneca insisted on checkin’ the younger men’s wounds. He
redressed the wounds an’ nodded his satisfaction.
The three fished off an’ on durin’ the day. The fish was
cooked over the fire an’ sprinkled with a little salt for flavor. The elk an’
bear meat was to be preserved for the long winter. Fresh fish wouldn’t be on
the menu often durin’ them cold months.
It were just before dusk that they heard the sounds of a horse
ploddin’ along the game trail. Now an’ again it would push against brush or
such. Teneca rose to look up the trail for a long moment. He wasn’t sure his
brother an’ David would be comin’ back that evenin’.
It was them, however. They both had grins on their faces
when they arrived at the campfire. The horse was laden down an’ had a travois draggin’
behind as they approached. The other three were on their feet an’ wonderin’.
Even in the dusky light it was obvious the two hunters had
the quarters of a young buffalo on either side of the horse an’ on the travois.
That’s what they thought at first. After a close examination they realized
there were only three quarters an’ no hide. That was odd. Very odd that there
was no hide.
A buffalo hide is a valuable thing.
31.
David told the story.
They hadn’t walked more than an’ hour up the buffalo trace
when they came upon a small herd of twenty buffalo pushin’ through the river
cane along a creek that fed into the one their trail followed. They paid no
mind to the hunters as they grazed on the young river cane sprouts.
Though there were several mature bulls an’ cows, David
suggested they choose a healthy young bull. They wouldn’t be able to carry all
the meat from one of the larger animals.
They quickly dispatched the young bull. The rest of the
small herd paid it little mind as they continued to move an’ graze through the
thick stand of river cane.
The two experienced hunters made quick work of dressin’ an
butcherin’ the animal. Nashoba made a travois out of long hickory saplin’s.
They had strong rope as well as leather thongs to make the travois an’ also hang
the quarters of meat on the pack horse.
As they worked in the early afternoon, they heard someone
comin’. They paused their work an’ David loaded his gun. Nashoba stepped into
the tall river cane to wait.
Turns out it was a long hunter David already knew. Man’s
name was Elijah Gilbert. He was well known around them parts. He was known to
be a long hunter, trader an’ part time preacher of the gospel. He also made
some right good whiskey.
The man saw David standin’ to the side of the trail an’
called out. He was leadin’ three mules as he traveled the trail. Each mule was
loaded with right good stacks of hides as well as several canvas bags on either
side of the mules.
Nashoba stepped out of the river cane when the man
approached. He too knew Elijah Gilbert. Gilbert often bought furs from Teneca’s
extended family.
Elijah Gilbert congratulated the two hunters on their
success an’ offered to help with the processin’. They agreed an’ the three
worked for several hours. As they worked Elijah pondered an’ made an’ offer.
Though that buffalo hide had great value once the two was
back home, He wondered if the two would consider a barter right then an’ there.
He had a little money an’ would pay good money but he thought they might have
an interest in the bags that hung from his mules.
Turns out he’d been up an’ over the Gap. Folks used to call
it the Cave Gap but a while back in 1750 a surveyor named it Cumberland Gap.
Sort of nonsense to name that gap after some fancy lord over to England an’ all
was Elijah Gilbert’s opinion.
Anyways, he’d been over huntin’ an’ bartered for a right
smart amount of salt. Seems like they was awful good salt works over to that
area. It was still mostly an undiscovered country. They was, however, a few
settlers makin’ their way over the Gap. Still quite a lot of raids by the
Shawnee an’ several other tribes kept many folks from settlin’ over yonder.
Elijah was told the buffalo was the joint property of both
David an’ Nashoba. They both agreed they would consider a swap. That is, if the
price was right.
Both men knew them bags of salt was worth their weight in
gold. Elijah explained each canvas bag contained fifty pounds of salt.
They paused to eat at the noon hour. David had a fryin’ pan
an’ a container of pork lard. He deftly cut several pieces of backstrap an’
carefully laid the pieces into the hot lard. Nashoba had a pouch of flour an’
made flat bread for each of them. He fried the flat bread in the skillet after
the back strap was done.
Elijah dug through his kit an’ found three right nice
apples.
The three sat an’ enjoyed their meal together. All three
told of news from around the areas they roamed. It was good to hear news from
other folks, other places.
Elijah warned of unrest between the colonists an’ the
British. He’d heard of them British soldiers carryin’ on as he traveled. David
also heard things. Distant things that had no effect on him just yet.
After the meal the three got into serious dickerin’.
Finally, they agreed to swap the buffalo hide an’ one front quarter of the
carcass for two of the fifty-pound bags of salt an’ a little cash to boot. All
three felt it was a fair trade.
Elijah helped the two hunters load the pack horse an’
travois. They helped him move the bags of salt from his mules to David’s pack
horse. They carefully rolled up the buffalo hide. Elijah tied it to the first
mule. He hung the front quarter of the meat to the second mule after he rubbed
the meat will with salt.
“We said our goodbyes an’ headed back here to camp after
that.” David said as he ended his tellin’ of the story.
David suggested they needed to unload the buffalo meat. They
needed to find a place in the brush arbor smoke house to hand that fresh meat.
It had been a great day for the hunters.
32.
Once they had the buffalo meat hung in the brush arbor smoke
house the men settled in. They did cut some right nice size steaks from the
buffalo meat. David found a large flat rock that he laid on the embers of the
camp fire.
He mentioned that he had to be careful with that rock. Can’t
heat a rock up too fast. It just might explode. Rocks was known to do that in a
campfire. As the rock heated, he prepared the steaks with a generous sprinkle
of salt.
He was proud to have as much salt in the trade that he made
with Elijah Gilbert. Nashoba also admitted that the bags of salt were indeed a
treasure. Though there were salt licks here an’ yonder an’ not too hard to
find, bags of already processed salt were something to be cautiously saved in
the wilderness of the Appalachian Mountains.
As the flat rock heated, David pushed more embers close an’
under the rock. When it was well heated, he laid the buffalo steaks on the
rock. There was the instant sound of searin’ meat. All the men grunted an’
nodded when they heard that satisfyin’ sound.
He left the meat on the rock for a right smart while. He
knew that turnin;’ the meat too early would cool the rock down an’ not sear the
other side. Better to let the rock heat back up before turnin’ the meat.
After a while the steaks was done. They all found good sized
slabs of bark that were used as plates. David grinned as he laid a huge steak
on each plate.
“Only thing we’re missin’ is some taters. If I’d thought of it,
I should have hauled us some taters from the house. Throw a tater in the coals
an’ we’d be eatin’ like some kind of king or some such.” David exclaimed as he
cut into the buffalo steak.
The five men used their knives to cut portions of the steak.
The tip of the knife was all they needed to spear the pieces. They didn’t say
much as they ate. They just enjoyed that fellowship that occurs when men gather
to hunt an’ sit around a fire.
When darkness wrapped around the camp, they sat an’ told
stories. The Choctaw men were all versed enough in English to enjoy the stories
David an’ Daniel told. They too told stories, stories from their culture.
Soon the stories turned to the unnatural, the spooky, the
stories that would make youngin’s stay awake at night with eyes lookin’ out
into the darkness, lookin’ for ghosts, spooks, haints an’ boogers.
It was late in the night before the men decided to sleep.
The night watch was determined with Teneca takin’ the first watch an’ David
takin’ the second. Nashoba next with Takoda an’ Daniel watchin’ in the early
mornin’ hours.
Since they had the fresh buffalo meat to deal with the next
mornin’, they decided to stay in place for a few more days. Though they didn’t
especially need more meat, Nashoba an’ Davis both agreed that the area would be
a good place to hunt an’ trap for fur. A few more days might allow for them to
acquire more hides. Those hides would provide income for both families.
Nashoba was workin’ on several traps that he would place up
an’ downstream in the creek. He’d seen evidence of a beaver dam below their
campsite. He also noticed several slides in the mud that indicated muskrats
livin’ in the creek.
The all paused when they heard the distant sound of someone
callin’.
“Yoo. Hoo boys. Hey howdy now. This is ol’ Elijah comin’
along the trail.” Came the call.
It was indeed Elijah Gilbert with his three-mule train. He
stopped just before the camp an’ tied his mules up just off the trail. He
walked in an’ was greeted by David an’ Nashoba. They introduced him to the
others.
They all stood around an’ visited for several minutes. Then
Elijah asked, “Y’eat yet? I got me a big fryin’ pan an’ a right smart supply of
corn meal an’ a side of bacon. If y’all ain’t eat I’m thinkin’ we put our
supplies together an’ have some breakfast. Maybe we fry up some of that buffalo
meat too.”
It was settled. Elijah took over the duties as cook. He pulled
out a big cast iron skillet an’ laid it on the fire. He assigned Daniel the
task of slicin’ some bacon while the pan heated. The bacon made plenty of
grease for Elijah to make hoe cakes an’ then fry up chunks of buffalo meat.
Them men sat an’ ate for ever so long. They shared with
Elijah how satisfyin’ their steaks was the night before.
“We might not want to go home if the eatin’ stays this
good.” Daniel exclaimed.
33.
Elijah agreed but suggested their families might not like
the idea of them layin’ round a huntin’ camp instead of headin’ home with the
supplies they had. He did agree that it would be a good thing to allow the
buffalo meat time to smoke for a few days before traveilin’ home.
“Would y’all mind if I hung my quarter, I traded for inside
your smoke house? I’ll help keep the smoke goin’ whilst we wait. I be chief
cook too if y’all want.” He asked.
They all was fine with that. They also suggested he might
consider layin’ the buffalo hide over the brush arbor in the same fashion that
they had the elk hide. The smoke an’ heat would help cure the hide an’ make it
more stable for Elijah’s travels.
Nashoba told Elijah his quarter would be better if they cut
it into smaller sections an’ salt at least a portion of the meat rather than
just smokin’ the meat. They took time to do so an’ both Nashoba an’ Elijah were
happy with the results.
They hung the buffalo hide on the outside of the brush
arbor. Nashoba suggested Elijah hang some of the other hides he had packed on
his mules. Though the fall weather was cool, it didn’t hurt to allow the smoke
escapin’ the brush arbor to permeate the hides.
The rest of the mornin’ was dedicated to camp chores. Daniel
an’ Takoda assisted Elijah as he spread his hides over the brush framework of
the arbor. David an’ Nashoba were off trappin’ up an’ down the creek. Teneca
determined to fish for their lunch.
The men planned on snackin’ around for the noon meal. Elijah
told everyone he would be makin’ a pot of stew for their supper.
After the mornin’ chores was done, Elijah dug around once
more in his packs. He pulled out a right nice size pot. He walked to the creek
an’ filled the pot with water. Once he was back the pot was placed on the camp
fire. Takoda helped cut pieces of buffalo, elk an’ bear meat into small chunks.
Elijah’s packs were apparently filled with surprises. He
pulled out a nice sized onion, a turnip an’ several taters.
Daniel exclaimed, “Oh my. Daddy will be thrilled. He was
just talkin’ about some taters last night.”
The onion was cut up an’ dumped into the pot. The various
chunks of meat was tossed in after the water began to simmer. Elijah cut the
turnip an’ taters into chunks that he added to the pot.
“Now we let that simmer for the rest of the afternoon. I got
me some spices I’ll add later. Got some pepper too. It’ll make a good stew
tonight.” He said.
34.
Many years later, Daniel remembered that evenin’ as he told
the story of that fateful huntin’ trip to his grandchildren. “That there stew
was fine an’ dandy. All them fellers ate like they was no tomorrow. We ate good
an’ made plans. Good plans that was sure unexpected.”
That huntin’ trip was the most told story for the next
several generations. It was a favorite around the campfire. A good story don’t
always have to be all about sunshine an’ roses, don’t you know.
That stew an’ the conversation of the evenin’ changed
things. Changed things in an unexpected way.
As they ate, Elijah sat an’ pondered. Teneca an’ David had
things on their mind too. Funny thing is, they all had some of the same
thoughts.
Elijah was the first to speak. “Fellers, you especially,
David, I’m wonderin’ if you’ve thought about stakin’ out this place? You know,
layin’ a claim to it. Ain’t nowhere I want to settle down or such. It’s sure a
good piece of ground right here. This here buffalo trace seems to be traveled
on occasion. Would make a good trail for folks to travel.”
Teneca nodded an’ agreed. Though he weren’t interested since
his family’s settlement was back in Georgia, he told David he too thought it
would be a good piece of ground.
“Elijah, sure is a good place. Trouble is, I got me a place
back home. Don’t know what I’d do with it.” David answered.
“Don’t you got kin? Brothers or even cousins that could
homestead a place with you? You was talkin’ about your extended family earlier.
We could help you claim a right good size piece of this ground while we linger
here.” Elijah suggested.
“I don’t know. It is a fine place.” David pondered as he
spoke.
“Here’s what we need to do. I got me some peach pits in my
pack. We plant you some peach pits to grow into trees. Shows you plan to
homestead this land. I’ve done a good bit of surveyin’. Me an’ one of these
fellers can survey tomorrow an’ perhaps the next day. Mark off what we can. I
have my survey chain, transit an’ scope. Did some surveyin’ for a land company
last year. Got it on that second mule over yonder. I’ll survey you a piece an’
me a small piece next to yours. If I don’t come back to homestead mine, well, I
can sell it one of these days.” Elijah suggested.
“Now, you should build a small cabin. Nothin’ fancy. Maybe ten,
twelve-foot square. You got an axe an’ hatchet. I got me one too. Got a small
bow saw in my pack. We could easy cut some small logs. If nothin’ else, you can
use it as a huntin’ shack. You already said you been here huntin’ before. I
reckon you’ll still come here to hunt.”
That settled it. Them fellers fell into the grand plan with
gusto. Elijah an’ Daniel chained off an’ marked the perimeter of the two
pieces. They made hash marks on trees along the perimeter of the survey to
establish the areas they would claim. Elijah already had the knowledge an’
experience an’ knew exactly how to make the claim official later on.
David, Teneca an’ Nashoba spent the next day cuttin’ small
logs an’ layin’ out a rough cabin. It ended up bein’ about twelve feet square.
There was a door but no windows. Saplin’s made up the slanted roof. They cut a
good-sized cedar tree. With the hatchet they made rough cedar shakes to cover
the saplin’s an’ make the cabin more resistant to rain an’ snow.
Smaller logs was split with the ax an’ a rough made mallet
to make a door. They used vines to make hinges. Once they was done with the
door the three stood back an’ admired their work.
They did not have time to make any sort of fireplace. That
weren’t necessary as they door to the small cabin faced their camp fire.
“Tonight, we sleep in comfort.” Teneca suggested.
Three days later they finally broke camp. Elijah dickered
for several days with Daniel for the elk hide. Daniel finally gave in an’ sold
the elk hide to Elijah for cash money. Not no British paper money either. Some
colonists was still usin’ British pounds an’ shillings. Daniel insisted on
Continental currency for the sale.
Elijah grinned as he counted out the money to Daniel. “Boy,
if you ever want to leave home, come go with me. I’ll make a trader out of you.
You got the mind of a trader. I believe you might be the first to get the best
of ol’ Elijah Gilbert in a trade.”
34 ½
Aunt Bess Carpenter had fallen asleep on the little brown
leather love seat that sat close to her Warm Mornin’ stove. She’d found an’
insisted on a vintage restored coal stove when she had her cabin built. She
often just burned wood in the stove. However, she loved the smell of coal
burnin’ slow in her stove.
Besides that, she weren’t a spring chicken anymore. She didn’t
care much for gettin’ up in the middle of the night an’ throwin’ more logs into
a wood stove. Give her a good ol’ coal stove any day. Put some right decent
sized lumps of coal in that stove an it would burn slow all night long.
Sure, she had a forced air furnace. Had that central air
conditionin’ too. Coal was a good bit cheaper than heatin’ the place with
propane all winter. The heat from a good coal stove felt warmer than that
forced air too. No place of a person to stand up against to get warm like there
was with a coal stove.
Anyways, Aunt Bess fell asleep earlier in the afternoon.
Myrtle Lee was back up to her home. She had lots to do up there durin’ October
to keep her busy. Now an’ again she’d come over to stay with Aunt Bess an’
visit around. She’d help out in the honey house when needed too.
Joe Henry opened a couple chests that sat in the basement of
his an’ Rachel’s home a while back. When he was sortin’ through the contents,
he found a number of old ledgers as well as numerous journals.
The excitin’ thing about the journals? They was not just
old. They was almost ancient.
Y’see, Selby Carpenter worked hard to teach her youngin’s to
read, write, cipher an’ such. When she could buy books for learnin’, she’d buy
classics an’ even school books for higher education. She “weren’t raisin’ no ‘heathern’
youngin’s” as several of her sons wrote in their journals.
They’d been taught basic geometry by their Mama, accordin’
to their own testimony. Both Judah an’ Abraham speculated that she stayed just
a few pages ahead of them as she taught them in their cabin home.
That was the treasure Joe Henry found. Journals written in a
fine cursive hand by all four of the Carpenter brothers, Judah, Daniel, Abraham
an’ Jacob.
Joe Henry hoped to read through the journals one day.
However, the Carpenter businesses an’ the anticipated December birth of Joe
Henry an’ Rachel’s first child kept him right busy these days.
Aunt Bess took custody of the trunk that contained the four
Carpenter brothers’ journals. She found that their children were also taught
an’ encouraged to journal, to keep their oral an’ written history recorded. It
was an amazin’ treasure trove of family history.
It also cleared up several mysteries an’ brick walls Aunt
Bess had concernin’ her family trees.
An’ it revealed a mystery.
Both Daniel, her ancestor an’ Judah wrote lengthy accounts
of a fateful huntin’ trip. Even their younger brothers as well as their
children an’ grandchildren wrote of the terrible scars they bore on their arms
an’ shoulders. Scars that was attributed to that horrible bear attack in which
they fought a bear that attacked their friend an’ brother. Aunt Bess took that
title to be a “blood brother”.
Though the name was often spelled in different ways, “Ahanu”
had been the one attacked as he was fishin’. She was still readin’ through the
accounts of that huntin’ trip. It was a story that had been told an’ retold by
several generations of Carpenter kin.
Why, even Rachel’s ancestor, Isham, who stayed home back
yonder in Tennessee, an’ who was just an infant when the story happened passed
the account along through his children.
Aunt Bess sat an’ tried to wake up from her unintentional
nap. She rose to clear her head from the “nap fuzzies”. She needed a cup of
coffee, maybe some sweet tea. Readin’ through those ol’ journals was serious
work. Especially since the cursive hand of the four brothers was so unlike
modern handwritin’.
She’d not found a clue as to that Ahanu’s situation. Had he
lived? Did he die from the wounds? Their accounts of the attack were terrible.
She suspected that in spite of all the ministrations by Selby Carpenter an’ his
mama that young man died.
She needed to search through the journals.
Then there was that other mystery. The little cabin an’ the
land surveyed by that Elijah Gilbert. She studied on that a right smart while.
They had a Gilbert line in their family tree. Was Elijah part of their family
tree? She needed to search that out.
But the land. After the War for Independence David Carpenter
was given a land grant also. He apparently claimed that land. She didn’t know
what ever happened to that land grant land. She wondered if the piece of land
surveyed by Elijah Gilbert became part of that land grant somehow.
She wondered if Rachel’s kin eventually inherited that land.
She had no idea.
Family legend an’ lore always said the David Carpenter land
grant was out there, waitin’ for his heirs to find it an’ claim it. Aunt Bess
wondered but doubted that. Taxes surely took it if family did not.
35.
It was a good thing them fellers built that little ol’
cabin. It weren’t much to look at. It would be a tight fit if they all tried to
sleep in it at once. They took turn about at the watch through the night. One
man was always awake. The other four slept inside the roughhewn cabin that
night.
Durin’ the early mornin’ a light rain began to fall. Teneca
was on watch as the rain began. He was up an’ in the cabin to wake Elijah. His
concern was for the hides Elijah had laid over the brush arbor smoke house. The
two made quick work of pullin’ the hides off an’ layin’ them inside the smoke
house. The elk hide was the most difficult to remove due to the sheer size of
the hide. It too was soon inside the brush arbor an’ safe from the rain.
Elijah an’ Teneca moved quickly to several pine trees that
were near the camp. With hatchet, bow saw an’ knife they cut more thick pine
branches an’ laid them over the brush arbor smoke house. The brush arbor had
been fine as the weather was dry. The rain concerned them. A heavy, extended
rain might drip through to the point that the meat would mold an’ ruin.
David heard the men workin’ an’ was up. He woke Daniel.
Nashoba also woke when he heard the sound of the hatchet an’
knife cuttin’ at the pine limbs. They joined the others. For the next hour the
five cut an’ laid thick pine an’ cedar boughs over the sides an’ top of the
brush arbor. Daniel climbed up into the trees that were the anchors for the
brush arbor. The others handed him branches to lay over the top of the
structure.
Nashoba stepped away from the work on the brush arbor to
check the campfire. He realized that if the rain continued, they wouldn’t have
much of a fire. He turned his attention to creatin’ a tall cover for the area
around the campfire. There were several trees close enough that he was able to
cut long saplin’s an’ create a cover similar to the brush arbor. Since the
little cabin was close to the campfire, he secured one end of the saplin’s to
the front of the cabin. Saplin’s crisscrossed an area high enough over the fire
to allow them to sit close to the warmth of their camp fire an’ be protected
from the rain.
David joined him as they continued to cut branches an’ lay
them over the top of the improvised shelter.
The cabin was provin’ to be watertight an’ would be adequate
shelter. Connectin’ the cover of the campfire to the cabin created a larger
area for them to huddle together against the cold, rainy fall day. The campfire
was not only warmth but was also their heat source for cookin’.
The area under the shelter was small, maybe about twelve
feet square. It was plenty for them to gather close an’ keep warm in the early
pre-dawn. They laughed as they stood close an’ allowed the fire to not only
warm their bodies but also to dry their clothes.
The rain persisted through that day. They all knew it
changed their plans. They couldn’t travel with the smoked meat until the rain
stopped. Even a light drizzle would be problematic. It could ruin all their
hard work.
The hides weren’t an’ issue. Elijah an’ Teneca cut an’ split
small pieces of limbs to make improvised hooks an’ pins, somethin’ like a split
clothes pin to hang the hides inside the brush arbor. They unrolled some of the
hides an’ laid them out on the ground. Others hung against the sides of the
structure. Those hides allowed more of the smoke to stay inside.
They would have to stay longer but would be safe, dry an’
together.
Daniel called the place, “Traveler’s Rest” from that day on.
When they would trek up that way to trap an' hunt they all would tell that they
was goin' to Traveler's Rest to hunt, fish an' trap.
36.
He never showed his concern. He never spoke of the worry
that haunted him. It wasn’t the way of the warrior. He didn’t show his anxiety
to the other men.
Teneca knew the women would care for Ahanu. He knew he would
be helpless an’ in the way. His wife, Isa as well as his mother, Apokni would
come when they learned of Ahanu’s injuries.
He also knew David’s wife Selby well. His many visits to the
Carpenter homestead gave him opportunities to see Selby in action. She was well
equipped to care for Ahanu’s wounds as well.
Teneca suspected that if he did travel back to the Carpenter
homestead at once he would be relegated to watchful waitin’. Women folks
usually just shoo’ed a man out of the way when there was nursin’ to be done. It
was that way for a Choctaw woman, that way for a white settler. Menfolks was
just in the way.
Teneca just chuckled to himself when he remembered how
Apokni, his Mama an’ the other Choctaw women chased him away when Isa began to
birth his children. He heard her moans an’ cries as she delivered Takoda years
back. He rushed, well, he tried to rush to Isa’s side. Back then he feared she
might be dyin’ when he heard her cryin’ out as she did.
Why, he’d never heard Isa raise her voice like that. She
sounded like a wild panther cryin’ in the darkness.
He did try to rush in to rescue his wife. He was quickly
turned away by laughin’ women. They laughed at him, pushed him away an’ called
him “foolish boy” in their language. They told him then to go hunt.
“Come back in many days, Teneca. Leave Isa alone. Leave us
alone to do our work, little Chukfi.” They told him.
He was angry back then. Told to go away, go hunt. Why, that
was his child bein’ born. A dreamer told him he was to have a son. His son.
An’ them women called him “little Chukfi”, little rabbit.
Now an’ again, when they was alone, Isa would call him
“Chukfi”. It was usually when he fretted for no reason. At least no reason in
her mind.
When they was alone, he often called her “Koi”, panther, an’
reminded her of her cries an’ screams in the night. He told her more than once
that the huntin’ around their camp back then was terrible after all the game
animals heard her cries.
Teneca wanted to travel back to the Carpenter homestead
immediately.
He knew if he did he would just be pushed away. His Mama
would tell him to go do the things a man should do. He could hear her even now…
“Go away, little Chukfi. Little Rabbit. Leave us to our
work.” Apokni would say with a shake of her head.
So, he stayed with the other men.
37.
That fall had been on the dry side for ever so long. Hadn’t
been no drought nor anythin’, just dry. Sure, they needed rain. It just weren’t
fittin’ for the rain to begin when them fellers all wanted to get back home.
Elijah Gilbert wanted to be on his way also. He had some right serious tradin’
to do over the next weeks before he made his way home.
Thing about long hunters was they didn’t get home much.
They’d be away for months at a time. Much of that time was in the fall an’
winter. Elijah had furs he hoped to sell right quick. He’d stop by home for a
week or two an’ then make his way into the wilderness across what Dr. Thomas
Walker had named the Cumberland Gap.
It was good huntin’ over yonder in what would become
Kentucky. There were already folks settlin’ down in them parts. The game was
still abundant. Huntin’ an’ trappin’ was real good. Elijah would cross over the
Gap an’ get to one of several places he knew to be good huntin’.
He had a rock house he liked to hunt from in the eastern
area over the Gap. He’d built it up the year before to make it more secure.
He’d hidden it so’s other hunters an’ trappers might not find it. Last thing he
wanted was to make his way there an’ find a squatter takin’ advantage of his
hard work.
Before he left back in the early spring he’d cut limbs an’
branches to cover the openin’ of his rock house. He tossed dirt, leaves an’
debris over his path leadin’ up to the overhangin’ cliff. He’d been right
careful not to take the same path each time he went into his shelter. Weren’t a
good idea to beat down a path.
Elijah was also careful because there were several tribes
that weren’t friendly to the while men that traveled through that bloody
huntin’ ground.
As the six men sat either in the log hut or around the fire,
Elijah regaled them with tales of his travels. He told of places that few men,
Indian or white men, had ever seen. It were a big country over across the Gap.
It was good ground over yonder. Good ground that was fertile, empty an’ broad.
He laughed an’ told them fellers that if a man spent too
long in them mountains, walkin’ around the sides of the hills they’d find one
leg had grown longer than to other. Had to be that way to allow a feller to
walk on them steep hillsides. He explained he’d overcome that problem by
walkin’ first favorin’ to the left then to the right as he walked the
hillsides.
Kept his legs even that way.
“Over here in Tennessee I heard tell of an ol’ man that
raised his cattle on some of them same steep hillsides. Sold his land one day
an’ decided to take his cattle off the mountain an’ down to a nice flat meadow
he bought with the proceeds of the sale. Lost ever’ single cow he had. Even
lost his bull once he herded them down to that meadow.” Elijah said.
Daniel was wide eyed. “Lost ever’ one of them? Even the
bull? What happened?”
Elijah got this real serious look on his face. “It were a
bad thing. Terrible thing boy. Them cattle came down from the mountainsides an’
into that flat meadow. Once they was there an’ commenced to grazin’ on the lush
grasses they kept fallin’ over. Seems they’d grown one side of their legs
longer than the other as they only walked one way on the mountain side an’ not
the other direction. They couldn’t stand up on flat land. They tipped over time
an’ again. Couldn’t even walk ten, fifteen feet without tippin’. Ever’ one of
them died of starvation. Couldn’t walk ten feet without fallin’ over. Remember
that, youngin’. Don’t be walkin’ the same direction in them hills or you’ll
have the same problem.”
The older men all sat an’ hid their grins with their hands
as Elijah told that tall tale to Daniel.
Daniel listened intently to the end. Then he pondered for a
minute, blushed an’ grinned.
“Shucks, Elijah. You ain’t right.” He said.
38.
Now, modern folks might think the women back at the
Carpenter homestead might get to worryin’ when the men didn’t come back right
away. Ain’t the case though. Them women had a lot on their minds just then.
Y’see, Ahanu was first an’ foremost on their minds just
then. When Judah arrived back home with Ahanu his Mama was right worried. She’d
never seen anyone torn up as bad as that young Choctaw man. She immediately had
Judah help her bring Ahanu in.
As soon as Judah arrived an’ she saw the extent of Ahanu’s
wounds she was into the cabin. She went into the lower bedroom that Judah an’
Daniel shared. She stripped the bed of quilts an’ smoothed out the mattress.
She knew they needed to make Ahanu as comfortable as possible. She sent Judah
to her husband David’s shed to fetch a large piece of leather made from deer
hide. She didn’t want the feather mattress to absorb blood as Ahanu lay on the
bed. She knew that could cause more pestilence an’ infection. She covered the
leather with a clean sheet. The sheet could be washed an’ boiled. She had
several that could be rotated under Ahanu.
Ahanu was in an’ out of consciousness as they moved him into
the cabin. He moaned when they lifted an’ carried him. His broken ribs made
every one of their steps agonizin’. He woke once he was in the bed. He tried to
object. He knew he would bleed all over the bed. He tried to insist he be taken
to the barn so’s as not to bloody the cabin.
Selby Carpenter, Judah’s Mama would hear none of that. She
told him to hush. She’d watched him grow into a man over the last years. She
weren’t goin’ to send that wounded warrior out to the barn like some livestock.
Ahanu knew when to hush. He protested again but nodded when
she looked at him with that look a Mama can give an’ that ends protests. Then
he was out again.
Selby began to look over his wounds. Judah explained what
they’d done before the trip back to the Carpenter homestead. His Mama nodded as
he explained.
“Good. Good. You boys done good. His wounds are right clean
but they are still raw. We need to get fresh bandages on him. You need to help
me than you go to fetch his family. Tell them to come here. Tell Isi, his Mama
that I need help.” She said to Judah.
Judah asked, “You need me to go over to the settlement an’
fetch that feller that claims to be a doctor?”
She shook her head. “No, He may have some books he’s read
an’ all. He might have delivered a few babies an’ took care of little things.
Apparently served in the British army too. Judah, he ain’t nothin’ but a drunk
from what I hear. He’s old an’ stays drunk. I heard tell his answer to
everything is to bleed his patients. Heard he was asked to help with a horse
that was down from eatin’ river cane. Bled the horse to death tryin’ to cure
it. Sides, I don’t reckon he’d come to doctor an’ Indian boy like Ahanu. No, I
need his Mama Isi an’ his Grandmama Apokni. Maybe between what I can do an’
their cures we can save Ahanu.”
Judah helped his Mama remove the improvised bandages from
Ahanu. She was wide eyed more than once as she examined his wounds.
“Mama, Ahanu’s name means laughter. I hope I can hear his
laugh once again.”
39.
Judah lingered as his Mama began to minister to Ahanu’s
wounds. He fretted each time Ahanu flinched or moaned. Many of the pieces of
clothin’ they’d torn into bandages had adhered to his wounds. Selby paused an’
went to the kitchen. She kept an iron kettle on the back of the stove. That
kettle was still hot an’ full. She poured the hot water into a wash pan. She
tempered the water with several dippers of cool water from the water bucket.
Didn’t need the water scaldin’.
She was back at Ahanu’s side with the pan of water an’ a
clean wash rag. She began to gentle lay the hot wash rag on the dirty bandages.
She was tryin’ to loosen them without pullin’ them loose an’ perhaps restartin’
the bleedin’ from Ahanu’s wounds.
The twins was in the doorway an’ tryin’ to see. They loved
Ahanu. He always spent time playin’ with them. He’d be chasin’ them boys
through the woods for ever so long when he came to visit.
“Go on, boys. Mama has too much to do to mess with you. Go
out to the barn an’ husk some corn for me. I’ll need you to feed the cows.
Wouldn’t hurt to check on the pigs too. Don’t give them no corn, now. I know
you like to baby them pigs. They don’t need no corn. Too scarce to waste it. Go
on now.” She told them
Judah was just inside the doorway. He still watched an’
fretted.
“Judah, seems like I told you to go fetch Ahanu’s Mama an’
family. Git. Git now or I’ll get the broom after you like I do them twins. I
need them women here real bad. I’ don’t know if my nursin’ is enough. I’m
hopin’ between us we can save this boy. Git, Judah. Tell them to come quick.”
“Yes, ma’am.” His only reply.
40.
The site where Ahanu’s family stopped to camp weren’t too
far from the Carpenter homeplace. Judah knew it well. He an’ Daniel visited
back an’ forth often when Teneca came to camp, trap an’ trade. Takoda an’ Ahanu
also made a well-traveled path between those two sites.
Because of his worry an’ his Mama’s encouragement, Judah ran
to the Choctaw family’s camp. He rushed in an’ startled the family. Several
were up an’ on their feet. They just weren’t used to folks rushin’ in like
that. Especially white settlers.
Because Teneca was a trader an’ the family group traveled,
several in the family were well versed in the English language. Judah had spent
enough time with his friends Takoda an’ Judah over the years that he had a
right good grasp of the Choctaw language.
As soon as he came to a stop he cried out, “Isa. Isa, where
are you? We need your help. Ahanu needs you. Mama said to tell you to come an’
help her. It’s bad. Ahanu’s bad hurt.”
Ahanu’s Mama, Isa had been cookin’ over a fire. She stopped,
stood upright an’ looked at Judah.
“Ahanu? Ahanu hurt? Where?” she asked.
As Isa asked about Ahanu, his Grandmother Apokni came close.
She didn’t have the broad range of English words that Isa had, but could carry
on a conversation an’ understood most of what Judah was sayin’. She reached out
to take Isa’s had an’ more than once shook her daughter in law’s hand to make
sure she understood what Judah was sayin’.
As they began to understand Judah’s urgency they began to
call out to the others in the camp. Judah caught much of the calls. They spoke
so quickly that he lost the train of the conversation. He did understand their
urgency.
Isa told him to wait as she an’ Apokni gathered things
together. Apokni was tearful as she worked. Isa was more serious as she
labored. Both mother an’ grandmother called out instructions to the others in
the family.
Isa stopped to speak to Nashoba’s wife an’ his Mama. As they
spoke Teneca an’ Nashoba’s Daddy walked up close. He was careful as he stepped
closer for he was almost completely blind. He was an old man by any standard.
He claimed to have seen over eighty winters. Today folks would understand that
cataracts had clouded his eyes to the point of near blindness. He had what some
would call “walkin’ around vision”.
They called Judah over. Isa explained that she an’ Apokni
would come with him as well as several of the older girls. She asked if they
all could come an’ be together there at the Carpenter homestead. If so, they
would come in two groups. The first group would come with Judah. The rest of
their clan would break camp, pack up an’ follow, most likely the next day.
“Mama said for you all to come. The men folks have meat they
are smokin’. They’ll probably be a couple more days. She thinks y’all need to
come an’ be close. These days none of us are safe if we ain’t got someone
lookin’ out.” Judah answered.
41.
Isa an’ Apokni gathered things together quickly. They called
to an’ fussed at the two girls that were to travel with them to the Carpenter
homestead.
Nita was Isa’s daughter. Shikoba was the daughter of Nashoba
an’ his wife.
“Nita, Shikoba.” Isa called. She pointed to makeshift corral
where several horses stood.
Nita, the older of the two answered an’ made her way to the
corral. She went in an’ put a rope bridle on one of the horses. She led the
horse over to where her Mama an’ Grandma were gatherin’ their things.
Shikoba spoke to her Mama for several minutes before she was
able to gather her pack an’ join the other three. Isa made quick work of
loadin’ their supplies on the horse. She called out instructions to the others.
She also called toward the woods in a loud voice. Three younger boys wandered
in from the woods. Two were Nashoba’s sons. The third, a boy of about eight
years old was Isa’s son.
Her father-in-law walked carefully toward the women. He had
a staff in hand an’ used it to help him find his way. Though he was mostly
blind, the women always gave deference to him in all things. His grasp of the
English language was minimal. He heard Judah’s voice an’ turned to speak to
Judah in his own language. He knew Judah had a decent workin’ understandin’ of
the Choctaw language.
In his language he asked, “We are welcome? Should we all
come? Is there a place for us to camp?”
Judah was careful with his answer. He knew Nita was almost
as well versed in English as Ahanu an’ Takoda. As he answered, he turned to
Nita a time or two to help him answer her Grandpa.
He answered in Choctaw. “Yes, you all come. Mama says to
come. I don’t argue with Mama.”
The old man laughed an’ nodded. In English he said, “We
come.”
Then in Choctaw he called out to the others to begin to
break camp. The women were standin’ an’ waitin’. They would not leave until
that blind old man gave his approval. Though blind, he was still their leader
when his sons were away.
Once that was settled, Isa smiled an’ told 41Judah they
could begin the short journey to the Carpenter homestead. Judah an’ the young
boys helped Apokni onto the horse. They secured the packs behind an’ in front
of her. She adjusted herself an’ the packs an’ nodded her satisfaction.
Nita an’ Shikoba wrapped their things in blankets that were
folded an’ tied into packs with strong ropes an’ leather straps. Isa also had a
pack tied that she slung on her back. Nita wore her pack as a backpack. Shikoba
carried hers like a bag slung over one shoulder an’ hangin’ at her side.
The said their goodbyes. Isa an’ the old man called out last
minute instructions to each other. The girls turned an’ waved as they left. The
three young Choctaw boys walked with the travelers for almost a mile before
Apokni told them to go back to the camp.
They laughed, turned an’ ran back, callin’ farewell as they
ran.
42.
Nita an’ Shikoba took turns walkin’ alongside of their
Grandmother Apokni. As they walked, she would, on occasion, point out various
trees or plants in the woods that surrounded the path. Each time she would ask
about the tree, plant or bush. She would quiz the two girls as to the tree,
bush or plant’s name in Choctaw an’ English. Then she would ask if there were
any uses, practical or medicinal.
That was part of their daily life with their Grandmother
Apokni. Though she was as devoted as their parents to learnin’ to speak, read
an’ write in English so’s they could continue the family’s duties as traders,
she was not goin’ to allow any of her grandchildren to forget the old ways, the
Choctaw ways.
Each chore was a learnin’ opportunity. Apokni would use the
little tasks as learnin’ opportunities. She’d been doin’ that with all the
family for many years. That was how she learned to speak an’ understand the
English language. Though she didn’t have the range others in the family did,
she understood more than most realized.
She just chose to use their Choctaw language so the
grandchildren would not lose their understandin’ of their own language.
As she rode, she pondered. When Nita walked beside her, she
pointed out a number of bare sassafras trees. The trees had already lost their
leaves but Apokni recognized them by their bark. Sassafras was always in the
undergrowth. It never reached the same heights as hickory, oak or even the
evergreen trees in the forest. The Sassafras was content to live in the shadows
of the majestic giants of the forest.
Apokni quizzed Nita as to the medicinal qualities of the
sassafras. It was a good tonic as well as a lovely tea to warm the body an’
lift the spirit. As they proceeded, she told Nita to point out the sassafras
trees along the trail.
Nita had a good eye for the trees, plants an’ bushes in the
forest around their camp as well as along the trail. She had no trouble
identifyin’ everything her grandmother pointed out. She had seen sixteen
seasons. Her grandmother an’ her Mama both made sure she was prepared for
womanhood.
After a while Apokni said, “Go walk with Judah. Tell Shikoba
to come walk with her grandmother. Leave your Mama alone. She walks alone
because she carries the burden of Ahanu an’ his injuries with her. She is deep
in thought an’ worries. Leave your Mama to her thoughts.”
Isa was walkin’ ahead of the others. She had her head bent
low as she walked. It was as if she did indeed carry the burden of her son
Ahanu an’ his injuries with her. Her mind was on the desperate need of healin’
for Ahanu. She hoped that she an’ Selby Carpenter, along with Apokni could see
her son through this desperate time.
43.
Nita ran ahead to catch Shikoba an’ Judah. Shikoba was a bit
less than two years younger than Judah. She was about the same age as Daniel.
Shikoba was, as Nita often said, like a mocking bird. Always chatterin’. As she
walked beside Judah she talked almost constantly. It weren’t often that she had
the chance to practice her English. She spoke to him mostly in English.
Sometimes she reverted to Choctaw to ask him a question fi she didn’t know the
right English words.
Judah chuckled to himself often as they walked. Shikoba was
indeed a chatterbox that day. He suspected she too was concerned about Ahanu.
That caused some of her nonstop talkin’ along the trail. She did ask him if she
could practice her English as they walked. He had agreed an’ didn’t mind.
Shikoba had asked as they walked about Daniel. He knew that
over the years Daniel an’ Shikoba had grown close as the families would visit.
They both were about fifteen. He an’ Nita were also about the same age.
When the two families gathered over the past years the four
of them had played in the woods around the Carpenter homestead. They all loved
“catch me if you can” an’ “hide an’ seek”. Judah an’ Daniel had the advantage
when they played hide an’ seek. They knew the land around their home well. The
two girls held their own in the mountains. When they raced on the flat fields
an’ meadows the two boys always won. In the steep hillsides the two Choctaw
girls had an advantage.
Nita said, “Koby, Grandmother said for you to go back to
walk with her.”
Shikoba ran back to walk alongside Apokni’s mount. Apokni
immediately began to quiz her on the trees, bushes an’ plants along the way.
Shikoba also had a good knowledge of all the things her grandmother taught. She
didn’t have as good a grasp as Nita, but she was also two years younger.
As Judah an’ Nita walked along they were quiet. Judah told
Nita how worried he was about Ahanu. She could see the wounds on his left
forearm from the bear’s attack. He had that sleeve rolled up because of the
bandage on his arm.
Nita asked questions an’ then asked Judah to tell her the
full story of the attack. He was hesitant at first then agreed an’ started at
the beginnin’. Nita listened without sayin’ anything.
He didn’t notice that Isa had slowed down an’ allowed Nita
an’ Judah to almost catch up with her. She slowed so as to hear Judah’s
accountin’ of the bear attack. She didn’t pause or join the two youngsters. She
walked just close enough to hear Judah’s tellin’.
Isa wept as she walked. Once Judah was done with the story,
she took up her pace once again. She wept an’ walked. Soon, soon they would be
there. Soon she could see her son.
44.
Nita an’ Judah walked along side by side. They spoke now an’
again about the huntin’ trip the four young men experienced before the bear
attack. Judah tried his best not to mention Ahanu. His friend an’ warrior
brother was always on the mind of everyone who traveled together.
To lighten the conversation, Judah reminded Nita of all the
years they’d know each other. He spoke about the two Choctaw men an’ some of
the mishaps all four of them young men experienced over the years.
Nita laughed an’ reminded Judah of several of his mishaps. She
reminded him that several years back she’d been angry with Judah, Daniel, Ahanu
an’ Takoda for not allowin’ her to wander the hills with them. She was just
about the same age as Judah an’ didn’t understand why she couldn’t race through
the mountains right along with them.
When they were all back at the Carpenter homestead Selby
asked Judah to see if he could find a knife she accidently left in one of the
out buildin’s. Daniel, Takoda an’ Ahanu joined Judah in the hunt.
As they stepped inside the log buildin’ to seek out the lost
knife, Nita found her opportunity to get even.
When they were searchin’, Nita slipped over, quickly shut
the door, closed the hasp. She had to take an’ old lock off the hasp to close
that hasp. Then, she decided to make sure it took a while for them nasty boys
to get free. She put that lock back on the hasp an’ locked it.
Then she went down the trail an’ back to her family’s camp.
She laughed all the way back. Once she was back at her family’s camp she told
her Mama, Isa of her revenge. Isa didn’t think a thing about it an’ chuckled at
her daughter’s revenge.
What neither of them knew was them four boys was not only
locked in, they was trapped.
Y’see, David Carpenter didn’t know exactly where the key to
that ol’ lock was. The four tried to get free an’ could not. They began to call
out for someone to get them free.
David responded right quick. He laughed as they called out
to him. In loud voices they told of Nita’s revenge. David told them as he
walked close that they probably deserved it.
Once he stepped up to the door he stopped, saw the ol’ lock
on the hasp an’ said in a low voice, “Uh oh…”
Judah heard his Daddy’s startled comment.
“What do you mean, Daddy? Why did you say that? What’s
wrong? Let us out!” Judah asked through the door.
“Boys, Nita put the lock on that hasp. She locked it.
Problem is, I don’t remember where the key to that lock is. Y’all find a place
to sit. I need to do some searchin’ around. It might be a while.” David said.
45.
Nita an’ Judah both laughed as they remembered that lock up.
Them boys was all furious with Nita that day. They ended up sittin’ for several
hours while David an’ Selby searched through the cabin an’ even the barn for
the key to that ol’ lock.
When they finally found the key an’ let them boys out they
chased Nita into the mountain. David an’ Selby grinned as they began the chase.
Nita weren’t no dummy. She was already standin’ near the edge of the woods when
the door was opened.
She laughed, called them several names in Choctaw, all names
of animals that were little, fluffy an’ fearful.
“Were you afraid, little rabbits?” she called.
They never did catch Nita that day. What them boys didn’t
know was that she hadn’t run up into the hillside as they assumed. They all
knew she was fleet of foot an’ fast as she ran through the hills an’ hollers.
When she ran into the tree line, she turned an’ called,
“Catch me if you can.”
However, she only ran a few yards into the trees. She was
followin’ a zig zag path that went up the hillside. Deer had made the path an’
they all followed it often. They would, an’ did assume she would be runnin’ up
that deer path.
What they didn’t expect was that she stopped an’ climbed up
into a large pine tree. She climbed up about twenty or thirty feet before she
stopped, coveyed up close to the trunk an’ waited.
She watched as they ran past her hidin’ spot. She waited for
a long time. Heard their voices as they ran up the hillside, callin’ her name,
tellin’ her of her fate if they caught her.
Eventually, she climbed down, walked down to the meadow
below an’ skipped back to camp.
“Yep. I remember you callin’ ‘Catch me if you can.’ We had
no idea where you were.” Judah said.
“Yes, ‘Catch me if you can.’ Was fun, Judah. You didn’t
catch me that time though.”
They walked on, still about twenty minutes from the
Carpenter homestead.
“Judah, this is the last fall that Shikoba an’ I will come
with our family to trap an’ trade.” Nita told Judah.
“What? Why?” he asked.
“I am old enough to marry. Old enough to have a husband. My
Granny, Apokni has decided on a husband for both me an’ Shikoba. We are both to
be married when we return home to our tribe.” She explained.
“It is our way.” She added.
Then Nita grinned. “One last time, Judah. One last time.
Catch me if you can.”
He grinned an’ ran after Nita. They didn’t wander too far
from the other three. Nita knew she would be scolded by her Mama if she ran off
too far.
As she rode, Grandmother Apokni watched an’ smiled.
46.
Once they arrived at the Carpenter homestead, Judah helped
Apokni off the horse. She patted his shoulder an’ thanked him. She then turned
to Isa an’ spoke to her in their native tongue. Both women began collectin’
bags from the horse’s load.
She spoke quickly to her granddaughters in their tongue.
Judah understood what she was tellin’ them. Isa added a few instructions also.
She told the two teenage girls to stay out of the way as they assisted Selby
Carpenter with Ahanu’s care. They were also instructed to take over the cookin’
duties so’s the three older women could tend to the seriously injured young man.
The twins heard the group arrive an’ ran into the house
callin’ to their Mama. They were excited to see Isa an’ Apokni. Apparently
Apokni believed twins to be a special blessin’. A nod of favor from God. A
while back she told Selby that very thing. Selby laughed along with Apokni more
than once when the Choctaw clan was visitin’.
Them twins knew how to get into trouble. Selby loved them ornery
boys, but they was a handful.
“Special blessin’, Selby Carpenter. Very special favor from
the Creator.” Apokni said with a chuckle when she spoke of the twins.
Judah was leadin’ the horse to the barn. He took off the
rope bridle an’ let the horse into a stall. He called to the twins an’
instructed them to brush the horse down an’ give it some hay. They ran into the
barn when beckoned. Them two loved horses.
They spent a right smart while groomin’ the horse. It was
smaller an’ stouter than their Daddy’s horse. The looked it over, looked into the
horse’s mouth to examine the teeth, picked up one foot an’ then another to
examine the hooves.
Them boys both loved horses, mules, even donkeys. When they
grew up, they both became excellent horsemen.
Selby invited the two Choctaw women into the cabin. The room
where Ahanu rested was dark so’s he could sleep. His sleep was troubled. She
did all she could to keep him comfortable.
She lit two lamps an’ handed one to Isa. The three went into
the room an’ just stood for a moment. Selby had the window open just a bit to
allow fresh air into the room. Isa gasped when she saw the extent of Ahanu’s
wounds. Apokni muttered to herself an’ tears fell on her cheeks.
Selby explained all she’d done thus far. The two other women
nodded as they listened.
“Those open wounds have been cleaned at that camp as well as
by me here. There is no sign of infection yet, but I’m still worried. He’ll
have terrible scars if he survives.” She told the others.
Isa nodded, “Selby Carpenter, you have done much. I thank
you. Do you think we close the wounds?
She turned to Apokni an’ asked the same questions. Apokni
stepped close, asked for one of the lanterns an’ examined the wounds. She
gently pushed the lips of several open wounds together. She carefully touched
several others.
Then she turned to the other two women. “Do you have good
thread? Steel knittin’ needles also? An’ fire poker?”
Selby was not sure of all the requests. “Why yes, I do. I
have some silk thread I was savin’ to make a fancy dress one day. Bought it
from a tinker, trader sort that we met a while back. I can boil that an’ we
could use it to sew up some of the wounds. Why the knittin’ needle? An’ why the
poker?”
Apokni was grim faced, “Some we sew shut. Must be done,
Selby Carpenter. We get poker an’ knittin’ needles red hot. We sear some wounds
shut. They are becomin’ sick. Heat will destroy sickness of flesh an’ close
wounds. Lay the knittin’ needle on some of the wounds, the poker into others. Must
be done.”
Isa was white faced, “But…”
Apokni shook her head. “Must be done Isa. If he is to live,
it must be done.”
47.
Selby Carpenter dropped the wooden spool of silk thread into
the pot of boilin’ water. She also dropped her knitting needles into the water.
She’d always heard that boilin’ things, even just boilin’ drinkin’ water killed
the bad things in that made folks sick.
Of course, they didn’t know about germs, bacteria, viruses
an’ such. They just were tryin’ anything that might keep those they loved an’
cared for well.
Isa an’ Apokni stood beside Selby an’ watched.
“How long?” Isa asked.
“Don’t know. I figure
the longer the better.” Was Selby’s reply.
Since Apokni didn’t follow the whole of the conversation,
Isa translated. Apokni nodded at the explanation.
Eventually, Selby used a spoon to pick the knittin’ needles
an’ spool of silk thread out of the boilin’ water.
Isa said, “Now we need to heat the needles up till they are
white hot. The poker too.”
They had already washed the poker well an’ had it ready to
heat up. Judah had been tendin’ the fire in the wood stove. The sides of that
stove were bright red as he used bellows to fan the flames higher an’ higher.
He’d stoked it well with lumps of coal.
He also had his Daddy’s tongs from small forge an’ blacksmith
shop behind the barn. With the tongs he laid the poker an’ the knittin’ needles
into the hottest part of the fire. Judah shook his head as he considered the
plans the three older women had for those items. He just couldn’t imagine.
Apokni an’ Selby came with pieces of cloth folded many times
to keep them from bein’ burned as they carried an’ used the red-hot poker an’
needles.
Isa an’ Apokni had brewed a thick tonic earlier. Selby added
a goodly portion of drinkin’ alcohol to the mixture. Though Ahanu was hesitant
to drink, Isa whispered, cajoled an’ urged him to drink. She told him of the
plan. He cried to his Mama an’ asked not to go through the pain that they felt
was necessary. He knew the pain would be unbearable.
“This will make you sleep, my son. I do not want you to be
awake for what is to come.” She whispered to him in Choctaw.
He gave in an’ drank deeply. She encouraged him to drink
again an’ again. He finally drifted off.
Apokni an’ Selby approached an’ quickly laid their
instruments into the designated wounds. Two red hot knitting needles an’ one
poker sealed those wounds. The smell of burning flesh was terrible. They handed
the instruments to Judah who heated them once again.
This time the medicated draught did not keep Ahanu asleep.
He woke an’ screamed when the heated instruments hit his wounds.
Judah was outside with both Nita an’ Shikoba. When they
heard Ahanu cry out time an’ again they began to weep. Nita stepped close to
Judah an’ he took wrapped his arm around her. She laid her head into Judah’s
chest. Shikoba came beside him an’ he took her into his other arm. They both cried
against him.
The instruments were heated several more times. Judah went
back an’ forth. Time an’ again he gathered the two girls into the safety of his
arms as they cried.
Ahanu cried out until he eventually fainted. It was then
that Selby took up her sewin’ needle an’ cut a long piece of silk thread an’
began to sew up the other wounds. She used a simple blanket stitch to pull the
sides of the wounds tightly together.
The girls cried an’ cried. That is, until Apokni heard them
an’ called out.
“We all will be hungry. I am glad you are already plannin’
to feed all of us.”
Funny how them tears stopped. Shikoba stepped away first.
She went inside an’ to the cook stove. Nita paused with her head still against
Judah’s chest. She wiped her tears an’ blushed.
“I am so sorry, Judah. Forgive me.” She said.
Judah blushed deeper than Nita had.
48.
Judah went about the chores that had to be done on the farm.
No matter how serious the situation in the cabin, no matter how bad Ahanu was,
the chores didn’t do themselves.
When Apokni called to the girls to prepare a meal, they
quickly obeyed. Selby came out momentarily an’ suggested there’d be plenty of
eggs. The girls or Judah could gather the day’s eggs also. She hadn’t had time
to do so.
Shikoba asked if she could make some flat bread to go with
the meal. She was more accustomed to flat bread than she was to makin’
biscuits. Selby nodded an’ pointed to the flower an’ salt cellar that sat on a
shelf to the side of the cook stove.
Selby washed her hands in the wash pan. “Girls, have Judah
cut some side bacon over in the smoke house. Tell him to draw up some fresh
water an’ have him gather the eggs. This here bucket is about empty. Maybe have
him draw the water first.”
Then she was back in the room where Ahanu slept a fitful
sleep.
Nita stoked the fire while Shikoba gathered the things they
would need to prepare a simple meal. Judah came in an’ Nita told him of his
Mama’s instructions. They also asked him to help find the things they would
need to cook.
They already found the basket of eggs. He’d been in the barn
so he did wash up before he went to do the other tasks. Nita put more wood into
the cook stove to get it to the right temperature for cookin’. They was some
good embers in the fire box so the wood took up right quick.
Shikoba asked for two skillets. Judah found one covered with
a towel in the dryin’ rack. The other was hangin’ on the wall just behind an’
to the right of the cookin’ stove.
“Nita, you go with Judah. Help gather the eggs an’ get pig
meat. I’ll tend the stove till hot enough to cook. I’ll make up flat bread.” Shikoba
suggested.
Judah was back in with the bucket of fresh water from the
well. As he sat the bucket on the side board Shikoba was checkin’ the fire box
on the stove.
“Is Daniel wounded too? I see wounds on your arm, Judah. Is
Daniel an’ Takoda wounded?” she asked.
Judah smiled a weary smile. “Yes, Koby, he too is wounded.
We all were.”
“Koby” was the nickname that Nita created when she an’
Shikoba were little bitty girls. The nickname stuck. Though her parents an’
Grandmother used her full name, all the younger family an’ friends often called
her “Koby”.
Daniel an’ Shikoba were close in age also. They had been the
youngest for s right smart while. They’d grown up together just as Nita an’
Judah had. Shikoba had been the torment of Daniel’s days whenever the Choctaw
clan visited.
One of her favorite torments was to throw pine cones at
Daniel’s head from her hidin’ places as he would pass by. For the first several
years or so, she didn’t ever speak to Daniel when her family would visit the
Carpenter homestead.
Moe than once Daniel an’ Shikoba got into pine cone wars.
They’d gather piles of pine cones an’ huddle behind bushes or tree stumps. Then
the fury would begin. They’d throw them pine cones as hard as they could. As
the one would toss the pine cone grenades, the other would gather them into
their own pile to send them right back.
Shikoba still had a little scar on her chin from a pine cone
that did a little more than a nick. Daniel got in trouble for that one. He
never mentioned the cut in his bloody scalp that occurred when she ran out of
pine cones an’ whacked him in the head with a well-placed rock.
49.
Selby, Isa an’ Apokni sat an’ watched over Ahanu while the
girls prepared the meal.
Selby already told Judah that the rest of the Choctaw clan
would be arrivin’ the next mornin’. She instructed him to go to the two cabins
back close to the tree line an’ prepare it for their guests.
Y’see, David knew his sons was growin’ up an’ would one day
have a family of their own. Over the past several years he worked with Judah
an’ Daniel to cut logs an’ begin buildin’ cabins they would one day inhabit.
Both cabins was built with care. David oversaw the plannin’
an’ site preparation. He made sure there was adequate space between them cabins
an’ his own. There was plenty of clearin’ around the homestead for the three
cabins an’ even a couple more if need be. Each cabin had one large main room
with a fireplace to heat the cabin. There was one additional room on the cabins
that was the bedroom. David made sure them cabins was built in a manner to
allow expansion in the future. There was also a front an' side porch on each.
The side porch was built so as to become an additional room by simply enclosin'
it.
Now an’ again both Judah an’ Daniel slept in their own
cabins in the last year. David insisted they build their own furniture, beds,
table, chairs an’ such. He helped each boy build up the firebox, hearth an’
chimney of their cabins. Judah’s furniture was a bit more finished an’ elaborate
than Daniel’s. Judah paid more attention to the fit an’ finish of the joints as
well as the surfaces of the furniture.
Daniel’s furniture was more rugged an’ heavy. He felt that
the furniture needed to last many years.
After Selby’s request, Judah opened up both cabins to allow
them to air out. He went to the wood shed an’ collected firewood for each of
the two cabins. Both of the boys had built a firewood box that sat beside the
fireplace. Judah stacked the firewood high in each cabin. Judah also stacked
the firewood high on the porches of each cabin.
After that chore was complete, he collected pieces of wood
to split for kindlin’. Each of the cabins had a vine basket for kindlin’. Judah
made sure each basket was full. He also checked an’ located the steel an’ flint
for fire startin’ that was settin’ on the mantle above the fireplace.
Neither cabin had a cook stove. Some day both Judah an’
Daniel would earn money an’ purchase their own cook stove for their cabin. There
was a wrought iron arm that swung into the fireplace that would allow a pot to
hang over the fire.
Selby sewed mattresses for the two beds. There weren’t
enough chickens or ducks to fill them mattresses with feathers. They were
filled with corn husks currently. A corn husk mattress was comfortable enough,
if not too quiet. Them husks did rustle ever’ time the sleepers shifted their
weight.
There had been enough feathers to make a pillow for each
bed.
Of course, there were plenty of quilts an’ such for covers.
Judah shook the covers out. Folks need to make sure there weren’t no waspers
nor stink bugs in the folds of them quilts an’ such.
Judah knew there wouldn’t be enough room in the two cabins
for all the visitors an’ Carpenter family. His next stop was in the barn. He
climbed the ladder into the hay loft of the barn. There was plenty of hay
stored up there. Before the two back cabins was built an’ when visitors came
all four boys would sleep in the hay loft. They didn’t mind though. They always
saw it as an’ adventure.
Well, Judah an’ Daniel saw it as less of an adventure as
them twin boys grew up. Them twins tended to giggle an’ carry on into the
night. Bless their hearts. Judah an’ Daniel gave them two knots on their heads
more than once when they refused to settle down an’ sleep.
It was, however, an unspoken law that them four boys didn’t
tell on each other.
Most of the time.
50.
Selby stepped away from Ahanu’s side to help Nita an’
Shikoba finish up supper. The side meat was fried, hot flat bread was stacked
high on a plate an’ Nita was just layin’ out hard fried eggs onto a platter.
Judah sat a jar of honey with comb on the table.
“Everyone needs a little sweetenin’.” He told the women.
Both girls had been in the Carpenter home a number of times
over the past several years. The two families had become close an’ were always
welcome when one visited the other.
Nita made sure everything was acceptable to Selby. Selby
smiled an’ hugged both Nita an’ Shikoba.
“This is mighty fine. Mighty fine. Thank you. You done good.
Let’s get your grandma an’ your mama in here to eat right quick. I’ll make a
plate an’ go in to eat as I watch over Ahanu.” Selby said.
She insisted that Isa an’ Apokni come to the table an’ eat.
She learned they hadn’t had anything to eat since their breakfast before they
traveled to her home.
Selby laid a fried egg an’ a generous piece of side meat
onto a piece of flat bread. She would roll that up to eat like a sandwich. Nita
made a fresh pot of coffee an’ Selby filled a cup with good boiled coffee.
Judah brought a small jar of cream from the spring house. Selby smiled as she
poured just a bit of the cream into her coffee.
“That boy.” She thought. He knew she enjoyed just a dab of
cream in her coffee.
Isa an’ Apokni fussed but saw that “Mama knows best” look
that Selby gave them. They knew it well an’ used it themselves many times. They
obediently moved to the table, sat an’ filled their plates.
“Judah, come eat. Nita, Shikoba, you too. Much to do when others
arrive.” Apokni commanded.
The youngsters sat but waited till Isa an’ Apokni had filled
their plates. They then filled their plates. They spoke softly as they ate. The
older women told them of Ahanu’s condition as they sat together.
“Grandmother, will he live?” Shikoba asked.
Apokni shook her head. “We don’t speak of it. Is not good to
speak of it. Do not tempt bad luck by castin’ opinions.”
That answer caused the three young people to stop talkin’.
They suspected Apokni would be more positive if she believed Ahanu was out of
the woods.
Judah had the twins come in to eat right quick. They weren’t
real hungry. They both was at that age that they ate when they was hungry. Ate
like it was goin’ out of style. When their minds was on other things they
sometimes forgot to eat.
After supper the girls set about doin’ the dishes. They
didn’t have to be told. They just knew them were the after-supper chores.
Judah was a different story. He had them twins to watch
after. He knew his Mama didn’t need to worry about them scamps. It weren’t no
problem, however. Abraham an’ Jacob knew better than get their Mama riled up.
No buddy. They weren’t goin’ to be causin’ no problems that day.
The three boys fed the livestock. Judah milked while the
twins fed the pigs, goats an’ chickens. Once the milk bucket was full, he went
to the spring house an’ lifted the lid off the milk crock that sat in the
little spring water. The spring bubbled out of a rock ledge at the back of the
spring house. The milk crock sat about half covered in the water to keep it
chilly. The water that came out of the rocks was so cold it was hard to drink
right out of that spring.
Later, when the milk settled down, he’d be back to skim the
cream off the top. There was a separate crock with a lid that the cream was
kept in. He lifted the lid of that crock an’ noticed that it was pretty full.
Tomorrow he’d get his Mama’s churn out. He’d get the twins to help him churn
the cream into butter. There weren’t room for the fresh cream to go into the
crock.
‘Sides that. They’d need more butter if folks was comin’ to
stay.
51.
The older women decided to take turn about watchin’ over
Ahanu. His temperature was risin an’ they was gettin’ concerned. Selby had
Judah draw up some fresh, cold water just about every hour so’s they’d have cold
water to dip wash rags into. Them wash rags was laid onto Ahanu’s head an’ neck
to try an’ take down the fever.
Apokni brewed more willow bark tea an’ combined that with
several different herbs she pinched an’ measured from little deer suede bags
she pulled from her pack.
It was difficult, but Isa an’ Apokni eventually persuaded
him to drink the brew down.
Apokni took the first shift. Isa decided to lay down in the
other bed in that bedroom. Though she fretted, she was soon asleep. Selby
couldn’t sleep. Instead, she chose to go outside an’ walk the perimeter of the
homestead. She often did that. She would walk an’ pray, speakin’ her prayers
out loud as she walked.
Her husband an’ youngin’s was used to her prayer walkin’.
Now an’ again her husband David would walk with her. They would walk side by
side an’ take turns prayin’.
Most of the time David’s prayer time was spent on top of the
mountain. There was a spot high on top of the ridge that had a magnificent
overlook. From there he could sit on a downed log an’ look down over his little
home place.
Nita an’ Shikoba were to sleep in the loft above the livin’
area of the cabin. Normally the twins slept up there. The twins were to join
Judah in the barn. The two other cabins was made ready for guests an’ Selby
weren’t allowin’ her brood to mess things up.
Nita saw Selby walk outside an’ start her circuit around the
perimeter. She pointed Selby’s walk in the dark to Shikoba. They’d seen her
make those long perimeter rounds often when they visited. They decided to walk
with her. They knew enough about her prayers to understand that she spoke to
the Creator as she walked.
They also know just then that Selby was walkin’ an’
interceedin’ for Ahanu. They both quickly donned their shawls an’ ran to join
Selby. The walked on either side of the older woman. Neither spoke as they
walked. They just walked beside her as she prayed. They listened as she cried
out her prayers. They were mostly about Ahanu an’ his healin’. She added
prayers for Ahanu’s family as well as for her family.
Though they didn’t know exactly how she prayed, they added
their nods when an’ appropriate grunts an’ whispers in their own language to
echo Selby’s prayers.
Eventually Selby tired an’ went back to the cabin. The girls
followed an’ climbed up the ladder to the loft. Selby went into her bedroom,
changed into her night clothes, was in bed an’ soon asleep.
Selby’s watch was the last watch of the night. Apokni woke
Isa to take over. They urged Ahanu to drink another deep swaller of the tonic.
Then Apokni was off to sleep.
Isa didn’t have to wake Selby when it was her watch. Selby
was already up an’ had brewed a pot of coffee. Isa weren’t ready to go back to
sleep so she sat an’ sipped on a cup of coffee with Selby.
“Isa, you need to rest.” Selby said.
“Sister Selby, we rest when Ahanu is better.” Isa responded.
52.
The rest of Ahanu’s family arrived mid-afternoon the next
day. They came with three wagons, horses an’ an ox.
Their arrival included Apokni’s husband, Kimeya, which means
singing throat, Nashoba’s wife an’ her elderly mother as well as five youngin’s
of different ages. Of that five, there were three boys that were between ten
an’ fifteen years of age.
Once they arrived, they were greeted by Judah. Though Kimeya
didn’t speak much English, Judah was able to speak to him in Choctaw well
enough to discuss the set-up Selby already had laid out.
Kimeya didn’t want to put anyone out. At first refused to
stay in the two cabins prepared for the Choctaw family. Both Selby an’ Apokni
heard Judah talkin’ with Kimeya. Apokni heard his refusal as well as his desire
to set up camp in the open spaces behind the barn an’ out buildin’s.
Isa translated for Selby.
At that point Selby gave Apokni “the look” an’ spoke to her
quickly. She walked outside to greet the others with Apokni at her side. She
knew that regardless of the women’s position in the family, Kimeya had the
final say.
Didn’t matter that he was blind with only “walkin’ around
sight” enough to avoid large objects or walls. He was still head of the family.
Selby had a hard headed husband. She knew that Kimeya was an
honorable man. She knew he was as hard headed as David Carpenter. She’d met
Kimeya in past years. She also knew that he weren’t tryin’ to be obstinate. He
didn’t want to put anyone out. He also didn’t want to be beholdin’ to anyone.
“Beholdin’ to anyone.” Is a big deal in the mountains.
However, she made plans. She knew rain was comin’. She figured
that ol’ man knew it too. She had a wrist that was broke a number of years
back. When a storm was comin’ that wrist would ache. That wrist was achin’ to
beat the band just then.
She called to Judah an’ Nita. “Come help me with some
translatin’, you two.”
They joined her an’ Apokni as the two older women marched
right up to Kimeya. Selby stopped just in front of the old man.
Apokni was grinnin’. She was wantin’ to see who would win
this battle of determination.
Kimeya was beginnin’ to call out directions to his gathered
family. Selby knew though he couldn’t see her well, he could see her image enough
to know she was standin’ there.
“Friend Kimeya, welcome to my home.” She said an’ waited for
Nita to translate.
The ol’ man nodded an’ thanked her for her hospitality.
Then she let loose. “However, if you do appreciate my
hospitality, you should understand I’ve prepared a place for you, for all of
you. You know my husband, David.”
She paused to wait for the translation. Kimeya waited.
“Even David knows better than to cross me.” She said.
Apokni laughed out loud as Nita translated.
Apokni spoke quickly to Kimeya.
Nita an’ Judah laughed an’ translated for Selby. They had to
tag team the translation for they both were laughin’. “Apokni just said ‘You
won’t win ol’ mule.’. She told him to do what you say. Said he might not see
but you an’ her are lookin’ mean at him.”
Kimeya laughed loud. He spoke quickly an’ nodded his head.
He held out his hand. Selby took his forearm as she’d seen David do with the
Choctaw men. He grasped her forearm an’ then drew her close in a hug.
“Yes, yes, I obey, Yunnish Chishki. Nita, tell her I obey.”
Kimeya said as he laughed.
He then told them he had to embrace her before she hurt him.
Nita was reluctant to tell Selby what “Yunnish Chishki”.
Judah was laughin’ an’ turned to Apokni.
He went back an’ forth with English an’ then Choctaw words
to ask Apokni, “Did he call my Mama ‘Mother Buffalo’?”
Apokni laughed out
loud an’ thumped Judah on the back. “Yes, Yes. Ol’ man is afraid of Mother
Buffalo.”
Kimeya understood an’ nodded. “Very afraid” he said in
English.
53.
Kimeya asked to be led into the room where his grandson
Ahanu rested. He left his walkin’ staff at the door of the cabin an’ allowed
Apokni to help him to the bedside.
“Here, here is a chair ol’ man. Sit.” Apokni said.
Selby lit another candle an’ brought it into the room. She
knew the one candle that burned was not enough for Kimeya to see. The second
candle illuminated the room just enough for the ol’ man to see the bed an’ the
form of his grandson.
Ahanu was still hot with fever. Kimeya reached over an’ felt
till he found Ahanu’s arm.
“He is hot, ol’ woman. He needs more medicine. Give him
more. Break his fever.” He said.
“Husband, he will not drink. He does not eat either.” Apokni
responded.
Kimeya shook his head an’ grunted the anger only a grandfather
is allowed.
He then shook Ahanu gently. “Ahanu, Grandson, wake up. It is
time for medicine. Wake an’ drink.”
Ahanu moaned but didn’t respond.
Kimeya then spoke in a stern voice. “Boy, up. Drink. Drink
now.
Ahanu came out of his stupor an’ semiconscious state for a
moment. His eyes opened an’ he looked at his grandfather. He reached out to
take hold of Kimeya’s hand.
“Drink, grandson.” Kimeya said gently as he held the cup of
medicine.
Ahanu nodded, took the cup in tremblin’ hands. Kimeya held
onto the cup, fearin’ Ahanu would drop it. Ahanu drank deeply. He paused an’
drank again till the cup was empty.
Apokni said she would take over watchin’ Ahanu. Kimeya shook
his head.
“I stay.” He said in Choctaw.
That blind ol man sat there beside Ahanu’s bed all night
long. He sat, occasionally felt Ahanu’s forehead an’ once called for Apokni to
bring more medicine.
He sat there all night long, quietly singin’ ancient songs
to himself.
54.
Kimeya eventually positioned himself at the end of the bed
Ahanu slept on. With the bed against the wall, the women needed to be able to
nurse Ahanu from the side of the bed. Kimeya was not in their way as he sat at
the end of the bed.
Apokni forced him to step away now an’ again to eat. She
knew the old man needed to stand, stretch an’ eat. She took water to him often.
He would nod an’ drink. He sang his whispered songs continuously. His throat
would dry as he sang an’ he appreciated the sips of water.
The first time he needed to step away an’ take care of his
“needs”, he was hesitant to use the outhouse. He wanted to go into the tree
line. Apokni fussed at him. Judah understood just enough of their conversation
to hear her tell the old man he needed to be “civilized”. He scoffed an’ said
he weren’t sure takin’ care of his “needs” in an outhouse had anything to do
with bein’ civilized.
Judah walked away chucklin’. He weren’t sure of that either.
The three older women took turns carin’ for Ahanu. They
slept in a designated order so as to be available all the time. When they
weren’t sleepin’ they tended to other chores around the Carpenter home. There
were bandages to be washed, wash pans to be cleaned carefully after use when
they tended Ahanu’s wounds.
The two girls, Nita an’ Shikoba took over a good bit of the
cookin’ so the older women could tend to the nursin’ of Ahanu. They both were
right good cooks. They were accustomed to cookin’ for the large family an’ were
able to prepare plenty.
Nashoba’s wife also set up a cook site over a fire pit in
front of one of the two smaller cabins. She cut three hickory saplin’s an’
created a tripod that hung over the fire. She prepared a hearty soup daily for
everyone to eat. Since they all knew the men would eventually arrive with
plenty of fresh meat, they made sure there was plenty in the cook pot.
Apokni an’ Selby worked together to make sure there was a
small pot of warm teas an’ tonics for Ahanu. They forced him to drink hourly.
He often would wake an’ try to refuse. That’s when his grandfather would speak
up. There was never any argument when Kimeya told him to drink.
They also ground up some of the meat in the soup till it was
in tiny bits that could be easily swallowed. They eventually were able to get
Ahanu to sip at mugs of that thick, hot soup. He gagged the first time he tried
to swallow. He shook his head an’ tried to apologize for spittin’ the soup all
over the quilts.
Selby let him know them quilts could be washed. She took
them immediately an’ replaced them with fresh, clean covers. They already were
switchin’ out the covers as they would become laden with sweat. When rain came,
they would hang the sheets an’ quilts in the barn to dry.
Ahanu lay there, almost always half in an’ half out of
consciousness, for two weeks. His skin puckered an’ was red where the women
used the hot poker an’ steel knittin’ needles to cauterize his wounds shut. The
wounds that had been stitched with the silk thread was closin’ up right good.
They three older women checked his wounds carefully daily.
Now an’ again they would use a bottle of David Carpenter’s moonshine to swab at
the wounds that looked as if they might fester.
After two weeks Ahanu woke real early one mornin’ an’ lay
quietly. It was still dark, long before dawn. He heard his grandfather, Kimeya
snorin’ low an’ slow. He was quiet. He didn’t want to wake anyone. He didn’t
want the attention. He didn’t want to be forced to eat that meat gruel they’d
been forcin’ down his throat. He realized he had a sort of diaper on under the
sheet an’ quilt. Ahanu weren’t too happy about that. Him Mama, Grandma an’ even
Selby Carpenter had most likely seen him naked.
That weren’t fittin’. Not fittin’ at all.
55.
Ahanu tried to move just a bit to find a comfortable
position. He bit his lip an’ paused to catch his breath. The wounds still were
inflamed an’ screamed into his brain as he tried to move. The life savin’ work
of the three women who nursed him closed the wounds, true. There was no sign of
infection. The problem now was the heat of the poker an’ knittin’ needles on
them open wounds made each one painful.
Once the wounds had settled a bit, the women began to rub
them with ointment. Apokni had pulled them shut as tightly as possible after
the flesh was seared. Once the healin’ began she took more thread an’ sewed
each shut. They got Ahanu likkered up with a draught that was mostly some of
David Carpenter’s moonshine before Apokni took up the needle an’ thread once
again.
Ahanu was ashamed of the names he called his Grandma as she
sewed. Likker or not, it hurt somethin’ terrible. He was ashamed that Selby
Carpenter heard the words he spoke, not aimed at anyone in particular. He was
most ashamed that his blind Grandfather walked into the room to cuff him on the
head an’ remind him he was a warrior, a great hunter.
He tried once again to move ever so slightly. A soft moan
escaped.
Kimeya stirred. “I hear you, Grandson. I am here. What do
you need?”
“Nothing, Grandfather. I am just tryin’ to get in a better
position.” Ahanu said.
“Not sure that is possible. You are much scarred an’
wounded. I help?” Kimeya asked.
“I am almost naked, Grandfather. They put a diaper on me.”
Ahanu said.
The ol’ man chuckled. “That is not what I asked. I know you have
a diaper on. There was no choice but to keep you that way, boy. The Creator
made you as you are. Why would you be ashamed as you lay there? You are
covered. David’s woman has opened her home. She had spent hours, days carin’
for you as has your mother an’ grandmother. Would you rather have died with
your clothin’ on instead of the women carin’ for you? They’ve bathed you. Yes,
butt naked they bathed you. They’ve washed out your wounds. They’ve salved
them, watched over each claw wound or bite to make sure it did not get sick.
But you’re worried that you have a diaper under the quilts? Quilts you have
probably ruined with your blood an’ seepin’ cuts. They’ve changed that diaper,
boy. When you soiled it, they changed it. They’ve washed them diapers an' the beddin’
daily so’s you’d have fresh clean coverin’s.”
“I must be gettin’ better, Grandfather. You would not scold
me in this was if I were dyin’.” Ahanu said as he tried again to move to a more
comfortable position.
Kimeya laughed, “No, child. I would scold you even then. Is
my job.”
Selby heard the low voices as she sat in her rocker just
outside Ahanu’s room. She rose an’ stepped in. she didn’t understand what
Kimeya was sayin’ but understood the tone of a grandfather speakin’ truths.
In a haltin’ whisper Kimeya said to her, “He worries, he naked
under diaper.”
Selby laughed out loud at that comment. Kimeya joined her.
Ahanu blushed.
“Oh Ahanu, if you only knew. I’ve had five boys, you know.
I’ve seen more than you can imagine.” She said with a chuckle.
She came close an’ laid her hand on his forehead. “Good. No
fever. I’m goin’ to get you some water. I have to draw fresh from the well.
I’ll be back.”
Ahanu tried to object. He said he weren’t thirsty, could
drink water that sat in the bucket. It was still a right smart while before
dawn. She didn’t need to go out in the dark.
“Hush, child.” Her reply.
Kimeya didn’t exactly understand her reply but understood
the tone. He laughed out loud once again.
As Selby stepped to the side board where the bucket sat, Isa
came out of the room where she’d been sleepin’. There was a candle burnin’ on
the table near where Selby had sat.
“He’s awake. No fever. He’s complainin’.” Selby said with a
grin.
“That is my son. If he complains he must be better.” Isa
answered, grinnin’ big.
“I’m goin’ to draw up a fresh bucket of water. We’ll get him
to drink.” Selby said.
“An’ we’ll get him up. He is to stand. We will help. No more
diapers if he can stand. He is a man. He will need help, but we need to have
him move. We’ll salve the wounds but they need to stretch or he’ll not be able
to move well.” Isa said.
Selby grinned as she picked up the bucket. “Oh, he’ll love
that. I’m goin’ to wake the boys. I’ll have them milk soon. We can get him to
drink milk this mornin’.”
Isa turned to face toward the loft. “Nita, Shikoba. Up. Come
stir the embers in the cook stove. Make some fry bread quickly. Ahanu is awake.
We need for him to eat.”
Shikoba looked over the edge of the loft. “Shall we fry
eggs? Hog meat too?”
“For him, no. We feed him fry bread this mornin’. For
everyone else, yes. Are there eggs?” Isa asked.
Nita was lookin’ over the loft now. “Yes, Selby Carpenter’s
hens have been gracious. There are plenty.”
56.
Kimeya heard the women talkin’ an’ warned Ahanu. “They will
be makin’ you stand this mornin’. An’ you will no longer wear the diaper. I
will go find clothin’ for you. Hold your water, my grandson.”
“Don’t worry, Grandfather. I will. I am not a child or an’
ol’ man. I can still hold my water. I may be unsteady on my feet. But…”
Kimeya chuckled. “I will walk beside you when you go make
water. I will guide you if you will guide me. They have an outbuildin’ for
doin’ them things. It seems unnatural, but will be better for you than to find
a log in the woods or try to lean against a tree.”
Apokni was up an’ joined Isa an’ Selby in the room. Kimeya
excused himself. He did tell the women that he would be helpin’ Ahanu find his
way to the outhouse. They objected but he turned his blind eyes toward each of
the three women, one at a time. They all stopped mid-sentence.
“I will lead my grandson. I go to find him a man’s
clothin’.”
“Just a shirt an’ breechcloth, ol’ man.” Apokni said.
She started to say more. Kimeya turned his blind stare
toward her. She stopped, smiled an embarrassed smile an’ nodded, even though
her husband couldn’t see that nod.
“Yes.” Her reply to his look.
It was a difficult mornin’. Selby came back with a fresh
bucket of water. They made Ahanu drink before he was allowed to stand. They
also made him drink a mug of milk, rich with heavy cream. He fussed an’ said he
needed to have Kimeya go for a walk with him.
Of course, they all knew what he meant. They knew the
urgency was there. They heard it in his voice.
He drank quickly. The cold well water made the urgency even
worse. Kimeya perceived his need an’ shushed the women. He stepped to the side
of the bed,
“Ol’ woman, help me lift him.” He said.
Apokni stepped to the left side of Ahanu. Together, his
grandparents lifted him up from the bed. They all could see he’d lost much
weight. The diaper began to slip off. The other women left the room. Kimeya had
the breech cloth layin’ on the bed.
“Hold him.” He said as he turned an’ felt for the breech
cloth.
Apokni turned her head as the diaper fell to the floor. She
closed her eyes an’ waited. Kimeya quickly secured the breech cloth to Ahanu’s
waist. He positioned it an’ then had Ahanu sit. Apokni already laid the shirt
on the chair by the bed. She retrieved it an’ pulled it over Ahanu’s head.
“Now, Grandfather. I need to go. Now.” Ahanu said.
His grandparents lifted him up. Ahanu was unsteady on his
feet an’ too much for Kimeya by himself. Apokni was on his left an’ Kimeya on
his right. He carefully lifted one foot then the other. His steps were
falterin’. He was, however, walkin’ after all the time he laid in the bed near
death.
It took almost ten minutes for his grandparents to get him
to the door of the outhouse. Kimeya felt for the edge of the door, turned the
wooden latch an’ opened it.
“Grandmother, please step away for a moment. Grandfather
will help me inside.” Ahanu asked with all the pride he could muster.
Apokni smiled to herself an’ nodded. She took a step back.
She was still close enough to grab the boy if he started to fall.
Kimeya helped him to step inside. He carefully turned the
young man around an’ helped him sit. “
“Shall I go out, grandson?” he asked.
“Yes, Grandfather. I think I am able to sit by myself. Just
stand outside the door. Perhaps close it partway. But stay close. I may be a
moment.”
Both his grandparents smiled an’ let out a small chuckle.
57.
Everyone around the Carpenter homestead let out sighs of
relief over the next several days. Ahanu was weak. He’d lost weight durin’ the
days of his struggle. He ate little durin’ the time of healin’. He often only
drank when cajoled or when his Mama or Grandmother fussed.
The first day that he was able to stand with much difficulty
reassured everyone that he would live. His Choctaw family that was gathered at
the Carpenter place relaxed an’ began to go about their normal duties. The
youngin’s from both families were allowed to play once again.
It was difficult for them youngin’s durin’ that time. Both
families told them to hush, to be quiet an’ not make noise. That just ain’t
fittin’ for a little o’ boy or girl. Them youngin’s needed to wrassle around.
They needed to run, laugh an’ play. No sense in tetherin’ their spirit.
When his Grandfather Kimeya again helped Ahanu out to the
“facilities” later in that first day they cheered. Cousins an’ kin ran to watch
as he carefully put one foot in front of the other. He grunted an’ fussed.
“A warrior, a great hunter like me can’t even relieve
himself without lines of spectators.” He complained.
Kimeya just laughed. “Grandson, we come into the world an’
leave it with someone else cleanin’ us up. It is the lot of the baby as well as
the ol’ man.”
“Don’t have to like it. Shoo. Go. Go on.” Ahanu cried out as
he looked right mean at then youngin’s.
The twins, Abraham an’ Jacob was like pesky gnats over the
next days. Though it was cold on them fall days, Ahanu’s Mama an’ Grandmother
persuaded him to sit out on the porch as they treated his wounds. They would
have him strip down to his breechcloth an’ sit patiently on a stool as Selby
joined them to inspect every gash an’ cut.
Apokni would look, move close to inspect an’ grunt her
satisfaction. Now an’ again she’d point to a place an’ ask Isa or Selby’s opinion.
Over the course of two days, she insisted that they sew up several cauterized
gashes that still seeped blood now an’ again. She was sure the sides of the wound
would still seal together.
Isa weren’t so sure. To make sure she took a boiled rag an’
scrubbed till them cauterized wounds bled. She then had Selby sew the edges
together with that familiar blanket stitch.
Ahanu sat an’ didn’t make a sound. Anyone watchin’ could see
him wince as the needle was driven through the fresh edges of them wounds. He
weren’t about to let the little ones know it hurt.
Abraham an’ Jacob found front row seats for that show. They
sat right on the ground in front of the porch. Their mouths was open wide
enough for a possum to crawl in an’ make its winter home. Though Ahanu was
aggravated by the audience, he realized their fascination an’ awe. They saw
Ahanu as a great hero. Not everyone in their world fought off a bear.
To ease the repairs as Selby sewed, he started to answer
their questions about the incident. Selby told them twins to hush an’ “git”.
Ahanu shook his head an’ told her it took his mind off the stitches.
He told the story an’ left out no details. Abraham an’ Jacob
was joined by the younger children. They all sat with mouths open as they
listened.
Kimeya had been back toward the small cabin he’d been
stayin’ in. When he heard Ahanu begin the story of the bear attack, he took up
his staff an’ felt his way to the front of the Carpenter cabin. He stood to the
side an’ listened.
He had heard the story from Judah. As Ahanu told his
version, the version of the one attacked, Ahanu didn’t exaggerate. He didn’t
leave out any details. He was careful, factual an’ honest. He told of his fear,
his pain.
“I knew I would die. I knew that bear’s name was Death.
Though at first all it wanted was the fish I caught, it saw me as an enemy, a
challenger for a meal. When I began to bleed, well, blood thirst made that bear
see red, it became more vicious as it took up what it saw as a challenge. I
knew I was goin’ to die.”
Jacob spoke up, “Why didn’t you just let the bear have the
fish, Ahanu? Why didn’t you just let go?”
Selby paused. She’d almost forgot to continue to stitch. She
shook her head to let Jacob know to hush.
Ahanu held up his hand, “No, is alright. I had no choice,
Jacob. That bear was on top of me. It was slappin’ at me, clawin’ my flesh. It
was already in battle mode. It didn’t see just a fish. It saw another predator
that it needed to conquer to eat. Toward the end I believe it saw me as another
meal.”
As Ahanu continued, the whole of those gathered stopped,
came close an’ listened.
“My brothers saved me. They faced that bear who was Death.
They fought Death for me. They fought with sharpened sticks, knives an’ their
bare hands. Judah, Daniel an’ Takoda faced Death with me. And we lived. We all
lived.”
When he ended his story, Abraham said, “Oh my, Ahanu. What a
story. Please tell us the story again very soon. I could listen to that again.
I don’t want to get hurt like that, but I sure wish I was an explorer, a great
hunter like you.”
Ahanu paused. Selby grinned as she pushed the needle into
the edge of a wound. She shook her head as the silk thread pulled through. Then
Ahanu looked for a long moment at Abraham. His eyes got this glazed, faraway
look as he heard a blackbird call back in the woods behind the cabin.
“Little brother, Abraham, you too will do great things. You
an’ your brothers.” Ahanu said quietly.
“How do you know that, Ahanu? I’ll probably grow up an’ live
right here all my life.” Abraham asked with an odd look.
“I just heard the Blackbird sing your names.” Was the reply.
Kimeya had started to find his way back to the cabin. He
paused an’ turned when he heard that last sentence. His blind eyes looked
toward where his grandson sat. He stood for ever so long. He pondered an’
wondered.
For he too had heard the Blackbirds sing.
58.
Ahanu continued to improve daily. His wounds became scars.
Those scars became stubborn as they healed. They would often crack an’ bleed.
The scars would not stretch as his skin would. Apokni refused to allow him to
favor the scars. She would fuss an’ force him to move his arms, legs to stretch
the scarred flesh. She would have him turn his head from side to side to
stretch the scarrin’ on his neck an’ shoulders. She would show him how she
wanted him to twist his torso from one side to the other.
At first, he complained. Told her she was cruel. He would
sit an’ scowl as his mother an’ grandmother rubbed an ointment made of beef tallow
an’ herbal cures into them scars. Apokni explained the tallow would cause the
scarred flesh to become supple, just as it did for leather.
Kimeya understood an’ never took Ahanu’s side in them
arguments.
More than once, Ahanu cried out, “Grandfather, tell the
women to stop buzzin’ around me like flies tryin’ to lay eggs in my body.”
Kimeya acted like he didn’t hear his grandson’s beggin’.
One day, not too long after Ahanu was tryin’ to get around
on his own, Ahanu fell in the middle of the yard. It was perhaps ten, maybe
twelve feet from the steps leadin’ up to the porch. Ahanu didn’t say anythin’.
He grunted when he fell. Several of the healin’ scars opened up a bit an’ bled.
Selby, Apokni an’ Isa sat with Kimeya on the porch. Isa an’
Apokni started to rise. That ol’ man, blind with just enough “walkin’ around
vision” heard more than saw Ahanu fall. He reached out with both hands an’ held
Apokni an’ Isa’s arms. He shook his head an’ pushed them back into their seats.
It took a moment, but they understood. They both relaxed an’
sat back. They went back to the little chores their hands was doin’ when Ahanu
fell.
The children playin’ in the yard paused. Judah was in the
door of the barn. He saw Ahanu fall. He too knew. He stood motionless. Nita an’
Shikoba were near Judah. Nita gasped a little gasp an’ almost reacted. She
glanced at Judah. He shook his head. Then Nita took Shikoba’s arm. She too
shook her head.
With great care, gasps of pain an’ much dignity, Ahanu rose.
It took him some time to stand. He stood, shook his head an’ brushed off his
knees.
“Mama, will you tend to a few scars? They begin to bleed.”
Kimeya began to sing a quiet song he often sang to himself
those days.
“It is the way of the warrior.” Judah whispered to Nita.
59.
It was nearly a month before the men finally arrived back at
the Carpenter homestead. Ahanu’s family were settled an’ an’ on occasion
traveled out to hunt, trap an’ trade with other Indian an’ settler families.
They were right well known an’ welcome.
They had some money for tradin’. Mostly they were fur
traders. The women in the family were also skilled at turnin’ them pelts into
beautiful leather an’ even sueded leather.
Now, we ain’t talkin’ about no rough, stiff cow hide. No
sir-ee. They worked hard to tan an’ process them hides into supple leathers.
Whey they had the resources, they’d brain tan the hides. That made for even
more supple leather. The women would lay the skins out on a wide board an’ scrape
the inner side time an’ again with broad knives. That would get all the fat an’
wayward pieces of meat scraped away.
It were easy to clean the fur off one of them pelts. A big
ol’ bucket or tub, plenty of water an’ ashes from a wood stove or even a fire
pit was used. Put the pelt in the bucket an’ pour in the water. Commence to
stirrin’ in the ashes till it is thick an’ soupy. Then just leave it be.
Check it daily. Eventually you’ll notice the fur begin to
slip. Them ashes will take that fur right off. Next thing folks do is take that
pelt to the creek or river an’ wash it good. If they done a good job, well,
that hair an’ the ashes will wash away right quick. Inexperienced hands will
most likely have to go through the process again. Don’t do the ash soak too
many times or too long. That’ll ruin a perfectly good pelt.
Leave it to them what knows what they’re doin’.
Anyways, the family did some tradin’ while they waited for
Ahanu to heal an’ for the men to return. The women folks made several pair of
moccasins for trade.
Nita an Shikoba beaded a beautiful vest that was to be a
groom’s weddin’ apparel. The groom an’ bride were friends of Kimeya’s clan.
They were to be married in the spring.
Apokni had a wooden box of porcupine quills an’ leather bags
full of trade beads. She oversaw the work that her granddaughter did on the
weddin’ vest. She picked out each quill, dyed them. She picked out the beads
that the Nita an’ Shikoba sewed to make beautiful designs on the vest. She’d
been the one to work the leather, bleach it till it was almost white an’ sew it
together. She weren’t havin’ no mistakes.
One might wonder why the men had waited so long. Them
fellers knew there weren’t a single thing they could do if they went back when
Judah took Ahanu. Teneca worried daily about his son.
One evenin’ them fellers, Teneca, his brother Nashoba an’
his other son, Tacoda was sittin’ around the fire with David an’ Daniel
Carpenter as well as Elijah Gilbert.
Elijah was smokin’ a long-stemmed clay pipe that was his
pride an’ joy. He had several others that had long stems once upon a time. As
them stems broke he would use his knife to whittle the ends smooth an’ keep on
smokin’ them pipes. Ain’t right to throw out a good pipe just because part of
the stem was gone.
Gets too short an’ it smokes awful harsh. Elijah would toss
them well used clay bowls with that nubbin of a stem out along the trail as he
walked.
Not this pipe though. This was his latest an’ best. Still
had a long, complete stem. The smoke drew real sweet as it danced its way up
from the bowl. Yessir, that were a good bowl of leaf.
“Teneca,” he asked, “Why ain’t you leavin’ your brother an’
your boy here an’ headin’ home?” Why, I’d stay too, just to help. Why not go?”
Teneca smiled, “The women would fuss. Tell me to go hunting
or trapping. Maybe go to trade. Just go they would say. So, I already heard
their voices. I have already gone. I am out of their way.”
“But what if Ahanu dies? I’ve seen the wounds on these other
boys. They’re hurt right bad themselves. They’re scarred up. What if your boy
dies?” Elijah asked.
“If he dies, my father will come. He will find me to tell
me.” Teneca answered.
“Your father? But I thought he is blind?”
“He is. If my son dies, my Father, Kimeya will have Judah
bring him here. He will be the one to come tell me my son is dead. He has not
come. My son lives.” Teneca replied.
60.
Now, don’t think that the men’s homecomin’ was some kind of
great welcome. No sir. It weren’t.
Them women was all glad to see them. The was laden with
meat, well smoked an’ salted. They had even more meat than before. They’d added
another small bear an’ a second young bull buffalo to their trophies. Elijah
tried to buy them furs. Problem was, David shot the buffalo an’ wanted it for
the warmth it would bring him an’ Selby as they grew older.
Daniel an’ Takoda killed the bear. They’d hunted with bows.
The stalk had taken a long time. They’d been upstream when they found several
piles of bear scat. The also suspected it were movin’ toward their camp.
They was right. The experience with Ahanu’s bear made them
wary. It also warned them of the danger of a bear near their camp.
They crept up an’ over a part of the mountain they’d been
huntin’ on. When they looked down, they saw a right big bear sittin’ on a
hillock. It was lean but healthy. It also had a gray muzzle. That told them
young hunters that it had been in the world for a while. Was an older bear.
Now an’ again it would lift its muzzle an’ take in deep
volumes of air through its nose. They could see the bear movin’ its head back
an’ forth. It smelled somethin’. It was tryin’ to get a better sense of what
an’ where.
They also saw them ears movin’ to try an’ catch any sound.
“Tacoda, that bear is goin’ to be trouble. It will soon find
the scent of our camp an’ all that meat. We need to act now. Can we crawl down
this hillside real careful like? They’s a lot of leaves. Can we crawl through
them till we get closer. We’re too far away now.” Daniel said.
“Yes, slow, my brother. Slow like a snail. Push leaves aside
carefully. We crawl on our bellies.” Tacoda answered.
“Look, just there, can we make it to that downed tree? If we
can get there, we have a good shot. What do you think? Can we kill it from that
tree layin’ down?” Daniel asked.
Tacoda nodded.
They both got on their bellies. Their bow an’ quivers were
on their backs. They reached out their arms an’ slowly, quietly pushed the
crisp leaves in front of them tone side or the other.
Thankfully there was a wind that moved leaves almost
constantly. The trees creaked as the wind pushed against their tall boughs.
That bear weren’t in no hurry. The two surmised that it was
waitin’ till dusk, maybe the dark to head toward the anticipated banquet
downstream. It sat on its haunches ever so long. Now an’ again it would lift
its muzzle an’ sniff. Sort of like it was makin’ sure supper was still there.
As the two crawled closer to their destination, that ol’
bear finally lay down. The wind blew leaves this way an’ that. Trees groaned
an’ sang it to sleep.
It had been almost an hour since the two started their
crawl. They finally reached the fallen log. They removed their bows an’ quivers
from their backs an’ turned to lay facin’ the fadin’ day.
Both removed one arrow an’ carefully nocked it. Tacoda took
out another an’ placed it in his teeth.
“Have a second ready, my brother.” He told Daniel.
Daniel did as Tacoda suggested. Both young men was breathin’
heavy. Their hearts was beatin’ hard. It was time.
They both came to their knees an’ drew.
What they didn’t expect was that ol’ bear bein’ up an
headin’ their way. It had heard either their movements or their whispers. Maybe
they smelled strong enough that the swirlin’ winds gave them away.
Whatever the warnin’, whatever woke the bear didn’t matter.
He was headin’ toward them.
61.
When them two got up on their knees, they expected to see
ol’ bear still loungin’ yonder. What they saw was a right big bear slowly
walkin’ their way.
At first that bear was slowly movin’ its head from side to
side. They could tell it was takin’ in deep breaths, tryin’ to smell somethin’.
Good thing was the wind was blowin’ toward them. The bear couldn’t smell
anything.
It did hear their movements as they got to their knees an’
drew their bows. The bear’s ears was pointed forward to capture the sounds.
Another good thing about the wind comin’ at them. Though it could hear the
rustle of their clothin’ an’ even the few leaves under them, it wasn’t able to
pinpoint where they was. That fallen log helped hide their movement an’
disperse the sound.
“A bear’s eyesight ain’t the best.” ol’ hunters always say.
Don’t let that fool you. Bears ain’t blind. They may not have the far sight of
an eagle, bobcat or panther. They do see better than one would think.
What do y’all call a hunter that believes that bears have
poor eyesight?
Supper.
Them two knew the bear had a better idea of their location
when his ears went back flat against his head. He started right toward them. He
was goin’ slow. He didn’t know exactly what he was headin’ toward. He weren’t
worried though. He was master of them woods, don’t you know.
Daniel got wide eyed when he realized they was the bear’s
destination. He quickly looked around, lookin’ for somethin’. He didn’t know
what.
Then he spotted it. Up yonder, to the left of that bear. Up
on a limb about twenty feet in the air.
He whispered, “Takoda, look up there. There, to the right
an’ up in that tree. See that squirrel? Can you hit it?”
Daniel knew two things; first, he knew Takoda was a better
shot than he was. He’d seen Takoda shoot a squirrel out of a tree many times.
Second, he knew Takoda could grab the arrow from his mouth an’ nock it faster
than he ever could.
Takoda quickly understood what Daniel was gettin’ at. They
didn’t have a good target if the bear was comin’ toward them an’ facin’ them
head on. If they could get the bear to quarter away, they would have a good
shot. It still weren’t sure of what was behind that log.
A squirrel fallin’ right beside it might get that ol’ bear’s
attention.
Takoda looked up in the tree, raised his bow upward, aimed
an’ let fly.
He hit the squirrel dead on. It squeaked an’ fell, not ten
feet to the bear’s left. It did, indeed stop that ol’ black bear. The noise of it
fallin’ caused the bear to pause. The smell of blood, the dyin’ sounds of the
squirrel made that ol’ bruin pause, turn to the left an’ take one, then two
steps.
Takoda had not only nocked the arrow he held in his teeth,
but had drawn another arrow from the quiver on his back.
Daniel shot first. The arrow sank deep into the area just
behind the bear’s right elbow. Takoda’s arrow hit the same area. That bear
grunted an’ stopped. Both boys shot again.
Later they discovered there weren’t even a need for the last
two arrows. The ol’ bear died instantly from the first heart shot.
The bear fell in its tracks. Takoda an’ Daniel knelt there
for a right smart while. They watched an’ realized their prey was dead. They
didn’t approach just yet. They’d been taught by some fine hunters. A wise
hunter waits to make sure dead is really dead.
Both young men leaned forward to plant their elbows on that
fallen log. Their hearts was still racin’ to beat the band.
They watched an’ laughed. Takoda put his arm around Daniel.
“Brothers, Daniel.” He said.
“Yep, brothers, Takoda. Now an’ always.”
62.
It was a harsh, raw, unforgivin’ world them young hunters
lived in. It given half a chance that ol’ black bear would not hesitate to hurt
them. Sure, most of the time them bears that populated the Appalachian
Mountains made wide paths around humans. Don’t get a Mama bear upset though.
Don’t go near their cubs. Don’t try anything that might cause ol’ Mama to fear
for her youngin’s.
The problem often came from the livestock the humans raised.
Food scraps left out for an ol’ hound dog, even a compost heap could lure in a
hungry bear. Chickens, turkeys, ducks, yep, all food to a bear. Sheep, goats,
young calves or even foals was a grocery store on the hoof. Dogs an’ cats?
Definitely on the menu.
Once a bear commences to hangin’ around a farm or cabin
pickin’ up a quick meal of livestock, they become a problem. A little ol’ boy
or gal ain’t much different to a bear.
Confrontations quickly escalate.
Panthers, an’ they was all over them mountains, them big
cats are different. They’re mean natured toward humans. They don’t care. They
don’t avoid human settlements. They’ll come right in an’ snatch whatever they
can.
More than once settlers or Indians have seen panther (often
called “painters”) paw prints in the mud or snow. That’s a warnin’ sign that
makes men wary. Better be lookin’ into the dark an’ keepin up your livestock as
well as your youngin’s.
As Takoda an’ Daniel waited, they spoke of stories they
heard of painter attacks. They shivered as they remembered stories told around
campfires of painters comin’ down from the hills an’ carryin’ off a sheep every
few nights.
“Takoda, Daddy’s brother was here last year for a week or
two. He told us ‘bout an ol’ man he knew over to Virginia. Was ridin’ at the
end of line of men. Ridin’ on his ol’ mule an’ followin’ a group of men that
was goin’ into the hills to hide from them British soldiers, them Red Coats,
don’t you know. The men in front of the line heard that ol’ fellow squall an’
stopped. They turned around an’ saw that a big ol’ painter had jumped from a
tree onto the back of that mule.”
Takoda’s eyes got wide.
“The mule brayed an’ commenced to buckin’ an’ carryin’ on.
Tryin’ to dislodge that painter. The painter was on the back of the ol’ man,
tryin’ to latch its jaw around the ol’ man’s neck. The mule took off into the
trees, That painter got holt of the ol’ man an’ dragged him off’n the mule. The
mule kept goin’.”
“What happened?” Takoda asked in a whisper.
Daniel shook his head, “M’Uncle didn’t know. Said that
painter drug the old man off. They searched an’ never found the ol’ man. Said
they found shreds of his coat. Bloody shreds. Nothin’ else.”
Takoda shuddered. “Brother Daniel, let’s get that bear field
dressed an’ get it back to the camp. I’m not ready to be drug off into the
trees.”
63.
Them boys was proud as anythin’ when they got back to camp.
Their daddies was surprised an’ pleased at that fresh meat. They had a bounty
neither family was used to havin’.
Nashoba helped with preparin’ the meat. They cut it into manageable
pieces an’ salted it well. Much of the meat they’d already collected was ready
to haul home. They was able to move them pieces off to the sides. That left
plenty of room for the fresh meat.
They did collect an’ start usin’ more hickory to smoke the
meat. Nashoba looked over the meat as they cut it.
“Teneca, I’ve seen chestnuts an’ walnuts along the path
yonder. Didn’t you eat muscadine grapes as you hunted?” Nashoba asked.
“Yes, brother. They are mostly dried on the vine.” Teneca
answered.
Nashoba paused to ponder.
“Daniel, Takoda, go find the grape vines. Bring back as many
dried muscadine grapes as you can carry. We have much to do. We make pemmican.”
Teneca nodded as Nashoba instructed the young men. He turned
to David an’ explained.
“David, we find large stone with a shallow bowl shape. Rounded
rocks too, hand size. We find those. We pound dried meat. We use meat that
doesn’t have a thick salt coatin’. Need much bear fat rendered. Pound the nuts
an’ dried grapes too.
They all went about the chores Nashoba assigned. The rocks
were gathered an’ approved by Nashoba. The ingredients was laid out. He pounded
the dried meat till it was almost a powder. He did the same for the grapes an’
nuts. Those were wet ingredients. He used a wide split board they cut meat on to
blend the ingredients. Now an’ again he added rendered bear fat to the mix.
He grunted his satisfaction at the consistency. Then he
shaped the mixture into loaves. Those he kept on the board. David helped him
carry board to the smoke house. They laid it close to the smolderin’ fire.
“Now we wait. We no eat the pemmican. Save.” Nashoba told
the others.
It took two days for the pemmican to dry adequately. Nashoba
checked it regularly by piercin’ it with a long, thin twig. When he was
satisfied, he placed it away from the fire. He did cut a small slice that was
shared by the others.
They all agreed it was delicious.
Nashoba looked around at the smilin’ faces of the other men.
“No more. Travel food.”
64.
Them folks at the Carpenter homestead heard the hunters as
they traveled along the stream that ran just below the farm yard.
The twins was the first to run to meet the hunters. They
stopped in their tracks when they saw the travelers. They was surprised at the
sheer volume of supplies the men brought with them. They also was surprised by
the presence of that older man, Elijah Gilbert.
They grinned, turned an’ ran toward the cabin.
“Daddy’s home. Mama, Daddy’s home.” They cried.
Ahanu was sittin’ in a chair on the porch of the Carpenter
cabin. Others were gathered nearby. Because of the many folks that was at the
Carpenter homestead, Selby had Judah set up a makeshift table under the trees
an’ near the fire pit.
Normally that firepit was where she did the wash or canned
her harvest. For the past weeks it became the place they took their meals
together. Judah used his Daddy’s saw horses an’ rough planks from the barn to
make a long table. With the help of Kimeya an’ his twin brothers he cobbled
together benches, stumps an’ chairs from the cabins to provide everyone a seat
at the table.
“Just fittin’ we break bread together.” Was Selby’s explanation.
Because of the number of those at the homestead, the adult
women, Selby, Isa, Apokni an’ Talli, Nashoba’s wife had taken over the cookin’
duties from Nita an’ Shikoba. There were many mouths to feed. They were usin’
the cook stove in Selby’s kitchen as well as the hearths in the two other
cabins.
Apokni was in charge of that takeover. She was worried that
the two girls would not be as frugal as the older women. She didn’t want the
take advantage or use too many of the Carpenter clan’s fall an’ winter stores.
Judah, the twins, Nita an’ Shikoba spent time daily in the
surroundin’ woods. They supplemented the stored food with fresh meat. They
added rabbit, squirrel, grouse an’ other game birds to the menu. Now an’ again
they were able to provide a coon or two. The twins led Kimeya to the stream
daily. He taught them much as they fished.
“No need for eyes. Fish with feel.” He told them as he would
hold his river cane fishin’ pole.
Though he could not see, he was a master fisherman. Kimeya
pulled out twice the fish as the twins caught.
He also was teachin’ them the art an’ pleasure of bein’
quiet. When they would get to talkin’ or movin’ too much, he would look in
their direction, shush them with a finger to his lips an’ point to the waters.
“They hear.” He’d whisper.
He knew a smatterin’ of their language. They knew a bit more
of his. The good thing about that situation was them twins couldn’t bombard
Kimeya with questions as they did with other folks.
The girls was best at gatherin’ the hidden bounty of the surrounding’
woods. They’d wander an’ find fresh greens, well known mushrooms an’ fungi such
as “chicken of the woods”. They all gathered mounds of chestnuts. Those nuts
was used as snacks, fresh an’ roasted. They made a creamy roasted chestnut soup
as well as a squash an’ roasted chestnut soup.
Selby made a spread of roasted chestnuts an’ onion to
slather on fry bread. Now an’ again she’d add bacon grease to that. Everyone
loved that.
There were plenty of punkins an’ squash from Selby’s garden.
The corn harvest had been very good that
year. Judah traveled to their distant neighbor. He traded work for a generous
load of bags of corn. They was puttin’ up a barn an’ appreciated Judah’s help.
When the men finally came into the yard, Selby stopped, put
her hands on her hips an’ looked with that “look”.
“David Carpenter, leave it to you men to come right at
supper time. Y’all get things squared away. We have more cookin’ to do.”
About then the wind shifted an’ Selby caught a whiff of the
men. “An’ husband, son, you other men too. You ain’t eatin’ a bite till all of
you get down to the river an’ bathe. Y’all smell like dead skunks. Not a bite,
hear me?” she said sternly.
All the travelers lowered their heads an’ said one version
or another of “Yes ma’am.”
Selby grinned as she turned an’ looked into the faces of
Isa, Apokni an’ Talli. They all returned her grin.
65.
It took the men two hours to get things settled in. Judah,
Daniel an’ Takoda helped unload the great load of meats. They were all wide
eyed at the sheer volume.
Kimeya came close. He touched an’ smelled the smoked, salted
an’ dried meats. He took out the knife he carried on his belt an’ cut small
pieces of different meats. He could tell just by feel an’ smell what the
different meats were. He carefully tasked each one.
When he tasted the meat from Daniel an’ Takoda’s bear he
paused an’ spoke to Teneca, “This one, bear, it should go close to the fire an’
smoke in the smokehouse. Tell David you must smoke this meat two, maybe three
days more. Is good but needs to dry more, smoke more.”
Teneca an’ David agreed. They’d been afraid that a storm
might be brewin’. Elijah said his ol’ bones was tellin’ him a storm was
brewin’.
The twins took the animals to the barn. Elijah instructed
them on how to care for his mules. They obediently listened but were quickly
off.
Selby was out the door of the cabin an’ over to David with a
mound of towels an’ a big bar of lye soap. She stood at arm’s length as she
handed the load to her husband.
“Go. Now. All of y’all. Go.” She commanded.
Again, all the men nodded an’ said their version of “Yes
ma’am.”
The older women looked over the meats as everything was
unloaded. They determined a hearty stew could be made quickly. Apokni cut large
slices of the bear meat that was freshest. It would need the least cookin’. Before
the men went to bathe, she sent Shikoba to wash the salt off the meat in the
stream below.
Shikoba an’ Nita ran into the tree line to a tree that had a
large growth of the mushroom called “Chicken of the woods”. That, the meat, turnips,
carrots, onions an’ some taters would cook quickly.
Apokni was grindin’ corn into a flour that would thicken the
stew.
Judah went to fetch more wood. He laid a great heap by the
fire pit an’ threw more pieces on the fire. He set up the wrought iron tripod
above the fire. Selby carried out her biggest kettle that she hung over the
fire. The twins paused at their Mama’s command. They fetched a fresh bucket of
water an’ filled the kettle.
Isa an’ Talli was back in the two cabins brownin’ off the
meat in skillets over the embers in each cabin. They cut that meat into little
pieces so as to get the meat done quickly. It would also go farther in the
stew.
Kimeya joined Ahanu on the porch. He insisted on two flat boards
for him an’ Ahanu to cut taters, onions an’ the “chicken of the woods” into
small pieces. There weren’t time for big ol’ hunks of meat an’ vegetables to
cook.
Nita an’ Shikoba was inside makin’ mounds of fry bread an’
corn meal hoe cakes. They giggled as they cooked. Shikoba whispered to Nita
time an’ again as to how Daniel had apparently grown to manhood while he was
gone.
“An’ him an’ Takoda killed a bear!” Shikoba whispered.
66.
It took a day or two for life at the Carpenter homestead to
settle down.
Elijah Gilbert stayed two days an’ then was on his way. He
did some tradin’ with David Carpenter as well as with Teneca an’ Nashoba. He
tried his best to get that bear hide that Daniel an’ Takoda had. Neither of
them boys would budge.
He knew better than to try to negotiate for the bear skin
from that angry bruin that attacked Ahanu.
He did swap some more meat from the men. Seems he had some
mighty fine knives that he’d been workin’ on as he stayed with them over to the
“Traveler’s Rest” spot they’d been campin’ at. Both Teneca an’ David admired
his work as he used pieces of elk antler to craft the handles.
Elijah said his goodbyes. He asked if he could pray over all
them folks. They all agreed. The women folks called to the children an’
gathered them together so’s they all could get in a circle an’ hold hands. As
Elijah prayed.
It took a moment for everyone to gather in front of the
Carpenter cabin. Daniel an’ Shikoba was the last to join the circle. Elijah
prayed an’ asked blessin’s on both clans. Asked that his travels be safe as he
left. He prayed that Teneca an’ his clan be successful in their trades an’
their journey back to their tribe in the Spring.
Takoda an’ Daniel helped him load two of his original pack
mules. He’d convinced David to trade his ox for the youngest of the mules.
David an’ Teneca helped him build a small sled to carry the massive supply of
meat, bags of salt, furs an’ hides he’d collected. His plan was to use some of
the meat, salt, a few furs an’ the sled to trade for a wagon of some sort.
Knowin’ the negotiatin’ power of Elijah Gilbert, he’d come
out just fine on that deal.
Apokni knew much about the Christian faith that the
Carpenter clan practiced in their daily lives. She spoke about God with Selby
as well as Judah, sometimes with Isa helpin’ with translations an’ sometimes
with her haltin’ English. She was a wise ol’ woman. She listened carefully an’
pondered a God that gave up His only Son.
She also knew folks was supposed to bow heads an’ close
their eyes while someone said a prayer or blessin’. However, when they All
gathered to pray, she lifted her head an’ opened her eyes a mite to look around
the circle. It made the ol’ woman smile with joy to see all them folks she knew
an’ had grown to care for joined together in that prayer circle.
She also noticed that Daniel an’ Shikoba stood side by side
as they held hands in the prayer circle. Both were blushin’ bright red.
67.
Teneca said it was time his family move back to their
traditional camp site. They’d camped there for a number of years. It weren’t
very far from the Carpenter homestead. They’d wait till all the meat was
suitably smoked an’ dried before they left. That would allow the Carpenter
family to get back to normal.
The next mornin’ after Elijah Gilbert left David was
brushin’ down his new mule. He was right proud of that mule. It not only gave
him another good work animal but also was goin’ to be a good ridin’ mount also.
Mules are a fine choice in the mountains of Tennessee, Kentucky an surroundin’
areas. They are surer footed than a horse on the steep hills of the Appalachian
Mountains.
He knew that he got the better end of the swap with Elijah
Gilbert. Tradin’ the mule for his ox an’ the buildin’ of a sled was a little
one sided. He suspected Elijah planned to do more tradin’ in the future. ‘Sides
that, they’d discovered The Carpenters an’ Gilberts was blood kin. Best they
could tell, Elijah was David’s third cousin on his Mama’s side.
Teneca walked up to stand againt the corral’s fence.
David turned to greet his friend. “Teneca, I want to make a
suggestion. I know y’all been campin’ at that same site for many years. What
about us helpin’ y’all set aside a new site just up the river yonder? Up on the
way to the places we hunted? I mentioned that one area to y’all as we traveled
back here. There’s a good-sized overhang, a rock house we use when we hunt up there.
I reckon it is about thirty feet long. Maybe more. In some places it’s at least
twenty feet deep. Tall enough to stand up in also. We could build a chimney an’
fire box at one end to heat it. Close it in at least part of it, maybe all of
it. Build a corral, a cabin or two
eventually. We could clear that area real quick like an’ y’all could finish up
your season there this year. Come back there year by year. We’d appreciate the
company.”
Teneca pondered, “I don’t know, Daniel.”
“Nother thing, I don’t know who owns that piece where y’all
camp. I don’t own it. Elijah is goin’ to register his an’ my claims for that
land over to where we was huntin’. That’ll be mine. In between, that rock
overhang I’m talkin’ about is on my property. No one can run y’all off it. It
will be yours for as long as you want it.” David said.
“We cannot claim land, David. It would have to be yours. It
may not be good for you…” Teneca said.
“I know, my brother. I understand. Not fair, but that’s how
things are. That’s why I think we should clean up that site up the river. It’s
not even five minutes’ walk. It would be good for both families.”
They talked longer an’ Teneca hesitantly agreed. He
understood better than David the problem of his traditional camp. There was no
guarantee his family would be allowed to camp there even the next fall.
Nashoba agreed quickly. He too knew the problems they could
encounter at their traditionalr site.
David, Teneca an’ Nashoba approached Kimeya an’ talked with
the clan leader about their plan. Teneca knew whatever he decided was fine.
However, he didn’t want his blind father to lose face.
Kimeya insisted they walk him to the site an’ lead him to
the rock overhang. He felt around with his hands an’ stepped the space off. He
nodded an’ told Teneca it was good. They then helped him walk off the clearin’
that would become their semi-permanent campsite.
With an elder’s wisdom he made several suggestions as to the
layout of the site. He saw things with his blind eyes that the other three men
hadn’t seen.
“Go back now. Send the young men back to clear the brush an’
weeds. We begin to build camp tomorrow.” Kimeya said.
Teneca, Nashoba an’ David grinned. It was good that the ol’ silver
wolf agreed.
68.
They sent all the boys an’ young men to the new site.
Nashoba went along to supervise. He had them usin’ a scythe to knock down weeds
an’ tall sweet grasses. They did leave the sweet grasses in the area where they
would build a corral for the livestock. They applied hatchet, bow saw, ax an’
shovel to clear up as much of the space as possible the first day.
Nashoba an’ Teneca was back with all the boys from both
families the second day. First order of business was to cut enough long
saplin’s to build a corral. Once the perimeter of the corral was assembled,
Teneca sent his brood into the woods to look for long vines of briars an’
brambles.
They cut an’ drug back dozens of long prickly vines. With
Teneca supervisin’, they platted them prickly vines in an’ around the saplin’s
that made up the corral’s fence. They would keep the livestock from pushin’
through the fences.
Kimeya joined the older men later in the second day. He
settled in at one end of the rock overhang. On the first visit Kimeya stood an’
felt the wind as it blew toward the rock overhang. He stepped up an’ down the
edge of the overhang till he made a decision.
The second time he visited the site he stepped off the
overhang again. Then he used his staff to lower himself to the ground. Teneca
an’ Nashoba tried to help but he brushed their hands away.
“I am not old, just blind, my sons. I can still sit on the
ground. When I am ready to rise, I will call to you. Then I will need help.” He
told them.
He pointed to the area in front of where he sat. The rock
shelf was lower at that end. A man could stand but would have to stoop a
little.
“Here. Here is where we will build a fire today. Keep my old
bones warm as you work. We will build a firebox here with stones. Good flat
stones. Build up a chimney too. Have to young ones help gather good rocks, flat
an’ big to lay a fire box today. Friend David tells me there is a bank of clay
and plenty of sand by the stream. Gather both to make mortar for the fire box
and chimney. It will need to rise above the roof of this rock house.” He
instructed his sons.
Ahanu insisted on joinin’ the other men. Judah, David an’
Takoda came with him in a wagon. They also brought a wooden wheelbarrow to haul
rocks.
Eventually, a year later, the entire lower wall of the rock
house would be made of rock an’ be joined up with the chimney. That wall would
provide a mass that would radiate heat into the area for hours even after the
fire went out.
The rest of the walls would be made of logs with mud
chinkin’ between each log. Much of those walls were completed that first week
of the build.
After one week the basic campsite was laid out. The rock
house, complete with a right good fireplace, was livable. It was comfortable
even. Kimeya was satisfied. They moved the livestock to the site on the fifth
day. Tacoda an’ some of the younger boys camped there once the livestock were
settled in.
Tacoda also built a brush arbor smoke house like the one
they built at their huntin’ camp Daniel called “Traveler’s Rest”. They was able
to hang all their smoked meat inside for storage. They also continued to hunt
an’ trap. The brush arbor provided them with space to work on hides an’ cure
additional meat.
69.
The Carpenter twins an’ Teneca’s boys decided that a brush
arbor for the youngin’s to work an’ play in was called for. They asked Kimeya
if they could build such away from the work the men was doin’. He grinned an’
agreed. Told them to build it toward the edge of the camp. Down toward the
Carpenter homestead.
He figured that would keep them out of the way. He also knew
that every boy loves a fort.
When their help was needed the men would call for them. Otherwise,
they were allowed to build their brush arbor. It became more than Kimeya or the
other men expected. They found four trees that were close together. Two pines,
a huge chestnut an’ a hickory tree. The used a hatchet to knock off all the
lower branches of the pine tree. Those were set aside to cover the roof of
their brush arbor.
Vines, saplin’s an’ branches were platted together to make a
fine structure. It ended up bein’ about fifteen feet from side to side. They
also used larger branches still on the pines to create a ladder of sorts. That
led up to a platform about ten feet up in the air. The pine branches were
supplemented with more vines an’ long poles to create a nest of sorts. They
even tied the livin’ boughs of the pine trees together with vines to make a
roof over their “nest”.
Them boys eventually brought Grandfather Kimeya to their
brush arbor for his approval. He had them lead him all around the arbor. More
than once he looked up an’ shook his head. Eventually he explained that even
with his blind eyes he could see light through their brush arbor roof. Outside
the brush arbor he showed them how to braid/platt long sweet grasses an’ thin
branches together to make mats that would cover the roof better.
Takoda saw Kimeya’s handiwork. He had Daniel, Judah an’ even
Ahanu join him to braid similar mats for the roof of their brush arbor smoke
house.
Daniel an’ Judah escorted Nita an’ Shikoba to the site. When
the young women saw the braided mats, they suggested they be allowed to help.
They both knew how to make them mats. Had been makin’ mats for years. The next
week saw many mats made for the top of both brush arbors as well as mats for
inside the rock house.
Because Ahanu was still healin’, they didn’t allow him to do
much. He usually sat with his grandfather at the edge of the rock house. Kimeya
did allow him to dig a shallow hole to mix the clay, sand an’ water to make the
mortar to go between fireplace stone an’ chimney. He worked at that each day
till he was made to stop.
Teneca’s boys an’ young men moved to the camp the second
week. Apokni came each day the first week. She chose a site for a deep fire
pit. If she an’ the others were to cook, they needed a place out of the winds
as well as deep enough to build up good embers to cook over.
Isa came an’ looked things over. She fussed at Teneca an’
her brother-in-law, Nashoba. She took them downwind an’ pointed to a place to
build an outhouse for the clan to use. She was amazed the men hadn’t thought of
that convenience.
70.
Nita an’ Shikoba bounced back an’ forth between the
Carpenter homestead an’ their family’s new camp. Often Shikoba would walk back an’
forth with Daniel. Nita still did the prayer walks with Selby Carpenter. Occasionally
when Nita walked the property with Selby, Judah would join them. They walked
quietly. They seldom said a word. Selby tended to walk ahead of Nita an’ Judah.
Most times they walked side by side. Occasionally their
hands would touch. When their hands touched, they would flinch an’ move further
apart. Sometimes Judah would apologize. He knew she was to be married when the
family returned to Georgia. She was careful to not do anything her family would
look down upon. Judah did all he could to show his respect for their Choctaw
customs.
Shikoba was less circumspect about her pendin’ marriage. She
knew the man she was to marry. He was thirty-four years old, more than twice
her age of sixteen. She’d just recently turned sixteen. She was also not as
obedient as Nita.
Everyone in both families knew that Nita an’ Shikoba
wouldn’t return the next fall. They all did all they could to make this last
season memorable for the two girls. At seventeen an’ sixteen they were already
considered adults in both cultures.
Judah, Daniel, Nita an’ Shikoba had grown up together. Ahanu
an’ Takoda were both several years older than the four younger ones. Each fall
huntin’ an’ trappin’ season became reunions for the two clans.
Apokni had Nita an’ Shikoba look over the younger boy’s
brush arbor. She was concerned that it might collapse as the youngin’s played
in it.
Daniel already finished his chores so decided to tag along.
He also did an’ inspection. He noticed that the vines weren’t tied well. The
little ones didn’t have the strength to pull at the vines enough. He pulled an’
tied till he was satisfied.
Shikoba went up into the upper level. She called down to
Jacob an’ asked about several poles that were just stuck into the pine tree
boughs. She pointed out that the wind would cause the pine trees to move. The
long poles weren’t secured. They were just stuck in the joints of the limbs.
Daniel heard her an’ suggested he could go back to his
Daddy’s barn an’ bring back some old wire. Shikoba thought that was a fine an’
dandy idea.
He was quickly back.
Shikoba told the young boys to get out of the way. They lost
interest an’ wandered off. Daniel used his knife to cut several notches in the poles.
He then wrapped the wire around the poles in into them notches. He tested an’
found the joint secure.
About thirty minutes later Apokni walked into the camp. She
looked into the brush arbor as she walked past.
“Them two did a fine job securin’ that top part for the boys.”
she thought to herself.
As she walked past, she paused an’ looked back.
71.
Two weeks in an’ the Choctaw clan were settled in at their
new camp. Everyone in both families had to admit that the new camp was a much
better choice than the previous one. It was the rock house that gave the family
the most improvement.
The smoke house brush arbor became an integral part of the
camp. It was actually a genius creation by the young hunters that created one
at their earlier huntin’ camp.
It became a favorite place for Kimeya.
He would often find his way an’ go into the smoke house to
sit alone. He found that if he sat at the door the smoke was not overwhelmin’.
It also gave him a little privacy that he didn’t have in the rock house.
The men were still huntin’ an’ trappin’. They would return
to their permanent home in Georgia in early spring. This year they would return
home with vast amounts of meat for their extended family as well as more furs
than they’d returned home with in years.
Teneca an’ Nashoba were pleased with their growin’ food
stocks. They still wandered the hills an’ hollers to hunt for smaller game that
went toward their day-to-day needs. The huge bag of salt that Elijah Gilbert
traded with them was a bonus. They used it sparingly so as to have a good
supply to take home.
Elijah promised to return before spring. He planned on
registerin’ the surveys of his an’ David’s properties up by the huntin’ camp.
He’d be bringin’ back the official deed to David. He also hoped to barter for
more salt an’ other supplies the Carpenter clan an’ Teneca’s clan might need.
Though they were old, Kimeya an’ Apokni were still the heads
of the Choctaw clan gathered there. The other elder in their travelin’ clan was
Nashoba’s wife Talli’s mother. She’d traveled with them ever since her daughter
married Nashoba. She was the oldest in the travelin’ clan by over fifteen
years.
Her eyes were blinded by cataracts. She was almost deaf but
still tried to help out when she could. When they moved from the comfortable
cabins at the Carpenter homestead, she took a turn for the worse.
She insisted on walkin’ to their new camp. They had wagons
she could have ridden in. However, she wanted to know just how far the camp
was. Though she was almost completely deaf, they could get close to her left
ear an’ make themselves heard.
That didn’t deter her or change her mind.
That walk was her downfall. She tripped over a root in the
pathway an’ fell onto her right hip. Modern medicine might have been able to
care for her broken hip. The break became septic. She knew, as did the others
that her time was short.
As she weakened, she called to one an’ then another of her
family. She gave them her blessin’s as well as advice. Her voice became weaker
toward the end. Her mind did not falter. Just a few days before her death she
sat with Shikoba. She was givin’ final instructions to her granddaughter.
Before Shikoba stood to go the ol woman took her
granddaughter’s hand. She held it for ever so long. She was to give Shikoba a
final blessin’ for she knew her death was imminent.
She held Shikoba’s hand for a long time. She held out her
other hand an’ Shikoba placed her hand in her grandmother’s hand. They sat
there for ten, then fifteen minutes.
She finally pulled Shikoba to her an’ held her granddaughter
tight.
“Little one, go find your mother Talli. Bring her to me.”
She told Shikoba.
72.
Shikoba returned with her mother, Talli.
The ol’ woman motioned for Talli to sit on her left an’ for
Shikoba to sit on her right side. Once they were sittin’, she carefully tried
to sit up more. She’d been mostly reclinin’ on her left side to keep the pain
away. Though Apokni provided doses of willow bark tonic laced with likker an’
healin’ herbs, the pain was becoming intolerable.
Talli fussed an’ tried to make her Mama lay back in the
reclinin’ position she’d been in. The ol’ woman shook her head. She told them
to help her sit. She favored her left hip as she sat. She took the hands of
both her daughter an’ granddaughter to keep her from fallin’ back.
She could feel the tension in her granddaughter’s hand. That
poor thing was shakin’ hard.
“Talli, there is somethin’ I must tell you. I am about to
give my granddaughter my blessin’ but I need you to be here just now.”
Talli nodded. Her mother didn’t see that nod but knew it was
there. She squeezed her daughter’s hand in response.
“Talli, my child.” The ol’ woman paused.
“Do you know that my granddaughter is with child? It is a
good thing, Talli. It is a very good thing, Shikoba.” She said.
Shikoba gasped. Her Mama took in a deep breath.
Talli started to speak. Her mother squeezed her hand hard
an’ shook her head.
“Talli, I will not live much longer. I think the Creator
wanted me to see once again. Oh, not with these eyes. They will never see
again. It was as if a veil was lifted. I saw Shikoba as she grew old. I saw
this little one she carries. I saw other babies my granddaughter will carry
inside of her. This is a good thing. A thing that is an’ was always meant to
be. No one is to say anything against this girl. She is a woman now. She was
never meant to return home. Never meant to marry that old man chosen for her.
No one asked my opinion. I did not make that choice as was my right. No one
asked my blessin’ on that bond. It was never to be consummated. I was waitin’
to stop that marriage when we returned. Now, now I stop that union. There is a
better union that has happened.” The ol’ woman spoke softly.
Shikoba wept. Her Mama tried to remove her hand from the ol’
woman’s hand but the grip was too strong.
“Talli, Shikoba is to stay here with me. You go get Selby
Carpenter. Bring her to me.”
73.
Talli left an’ returned a few minutes later with Selby
Carpenter. Selby knew the old woman was weak an’ would die.
She came in an’ started to sit. The ol’ woman couldn’t see
her but felt the slight movement of the air as Selby entered. She motioned for
Selby to sit beside her.
Selby stepped close an’ sat. The ol’ woman felt for her hand
an’ squeezed it.
“Talli, Shikoba, translate for me.” She ordered.
She continued, “Selby Carpenter, I have much to say to you,
to these women here. You must listen with your heart, not your head.”
Selby nodded. She realized her nod could not be seen. She
also knew the ol’ Choctaw woman was almost deaf. She spoke loudly an’ agreed to
listen.
“Your son Daniel is a good man. A brave hunter. He helped
save Ahanu. They are brothers now. We are family now. Is Daniel a good man?
Lean close Selby Carpenter. Lean close so I can hear you.”
Selby nodded but also leaned her head close an’ answered.
“Yes, my Daniel is a good young man. A very good man.”
The other women translated back an’ forth.
The ol’ woman held Selby’s hand then took Shikoba’s hand.
“Selby Carpenter, this young woman is to be your daughter. I have seen many
things. She will not return to our tribe. She will stay here. Here with you.
Selby looked at Talli. “I don’t understand.”
Talli translated.
The ol’ woman squeezed Selby’s hand an’ laughed. “Shikoba is
with child. A son will be born mid-summer. She will have other children. They
all will make you proud, Selby Carpenter.”
Shikoba had been weepin’ quietly for ever so long. When her
grandmother’s words were translated Selby took in a deep breath.
“Oh Shikoba.” She said with a gentle smile. “I understand. You
won’t be goin’ back to your village, your tribe. You’ll stay here with us.”
Shikoba began to cry out loud. She reached over in front of
her grandmother an’ took Selby’s other hand.
“Do you love my son?” Selby asked.
Shikoba nodded, “I always have loved my Daniel. When we were
little, I told him I would marry him. I told him I would one day be his wife. But
it’s not a good thing for Daniel to marry a Choctaw woman. I know. We did not
plan this. I wanted him to be my husband. I knew I was promised to an older
man. There was no love there. I do not know if there ever would have been. My
father would get two cows for me as a dowery. I believed I knew the cycles of a
woman. I was wrong. I just wanted to be with Daniel. I just wanted to know him
one time before we went back to be with our tribe.”
Selby looked at Talli an’ Apokni. “What do we do?”
Talli asked, “Does your Daniel love Shikoba?”
“Talli, she is all he talks about. They are both young. I
wasn’t much older when I married David Carpenter. I was just seventeen.”
Talli smiled an’ nodded. “I was fifteen when I married Nashoba.
Our marriage was arranged. I love him though. I knew as soon as I saw that tall
young warrior that I loved him.”
Selby asked what they should do. They spoke, translated then
sat quiet with Shikoba.
Talli spoke, “I go to get Kimeya. It is his decision. He is
head of the clan. I bring Apokni. David an’ Nashoba also.”
Shikoba spoke up an’ wiped her tears away. “Bring my Daniel.
It is his decision, no one else. It is Daniel’s decision. It is mine. Bring Kimeya
but understand, it is our decision.”
Talli nodded, rose an’ stepped away. She smiled as she
walked to find Daniel an’ the other men.
74.
When the three men arrived with Apokni, they were told to
sit close to the ol’ woman. Shikoba started to rise but her grandmother held
her hand tight. She indicated for Daniel to sit beside Shikoba.
“Apokni, Talli, translate for me.” She said.
She warned the men to keep their mouths shut. This was her
work. This was her vision. This was her knowin’.
She told them what had happened. Shikoba began to weep.
Daniel was wide eyed. He smiled a tight, embarrassed smile
an’ blushed. He reached over an’ squeezed Shikoba’s hand.
“Daniel, do you love my granddaughter?” he was asked by the
ol’ woman.
“I love her more than life. I begged her to run away with
me. She refused. Said it would dishonor all of you.” He answered. “I’m so
sorry. We thought we could be together just one time. Just one time to know an’
share the love we have for each other. I did not know…” he said.
The ol’ woman smiled as his words were translated.
“Daniel, you will have a son. He will have brothers an’
sisters. Shikoba will be their mother. “she told Daniel through the other
women.
Kimeya, Nashoba an’ David both started to speak.
The ol’ woman’s face grew clouded. “No. You will all be
quiet. I am dyin’. You all know I am dyin’. I have seen this. You will not
argue or interfere. Kimeya, you will bless these two. You should not have
allowed the tribe to force the arrangement of marriage for Shikoba. Three years
ago, you agreed to a marriage for gain of place for yourself. You allowed it.
You made the arrangement for two cows. I’m goin’ to give them my blessin’ now.
You will too. David Carpenter, I do not know how you do blessings, but you too
will bless the marriage of these two.”
Daniel was wide eyed but grinned as the translations were
given. Shikoba looked at him. Daniel looked into her eyes. She was quietly
weepin’. He leaned close to her an’ whispered. His eyes were damp with tears.
“Koby, is that alright with you? I love you but will not
stand in your way or your family’s plans for you.” He said.
“My grandmother is goin’ to give me, us, her blessin’. It is
very alright.” She said.
The ol’ woman took the hands of Daniel an’ Shikoba. She
spoke slowly, almost singin’ the blessin’. Daniel didn’t understand all the
words. He had a strong grasp of the Choctaw language but the subtle nuances of
the blessin’ was beyond his understandin’.
Afterwards, they all sat an’ spoke for ever so long. At some
point Daniel an’ Shikoba snuck out. They heard that they were to be married the
next day at dusk. Daniel took Shikoba’s hand as they walked away.
“You are to be my wife, Koby. I can’t believe it.” He said.
“Daniel, I’ve always wanted to be your wife. I have been
afraid you would think I have tricked you. I love you. You do know it will be
difficult. I am an Indian, Daniel.”
“No, it will be fine. Not Indian, not white. Husband an’
wife. That’s it, you are to be my wife. Nothin’ else matters. No other name,
Koby. My wife. An’ not traded for two cows either.
Shikoba nodded an’ leaned into Daniel’s arms. “We are to
have a son. We will have other children. My Grandmother saw them.”
Daniel took her into his arms. “I can’t believe it. You are
to be my wife. We are goin’ to have a son.”
“We are to be married.” She answered.
75.1
Joe Henry Carpenter was sittin’ with Aunt Bess Asher in her
cabin on Limestone Ridge Road. She’d spent the last several weeks readin’
through the ancient journals he found in the basement of his home. That home
had also been home to his Grandparents for many years.
The ol’ trunk that Joe Henry opened had been in the back
corner of that house when Aunt Bess was a child. As far as she knew no one ever
bothered to open it.
Because of her legal trainin’ plus her interest in
genealogy, history an’ the Carpenter family trees, she was keen on takin’
notes. She had several legal pads full of notes. She also had a five-foot-long
piece of butcher paper rolled out on her kitchen table. That long piece of
butcher paper became a time line. She used a yard stick to draw a line in the
middle of the paper. She began placin’ dates, names an’ events on the timeline.
Now an’ again Joe Henry would stop by an’ they would look over the timeline. It
helped them both to understand the amazing story of their Carpenter family an’
all the associated families.
She had called Joe Henry an’ suggested he stop by. He too
was intrigued by all the journals. Problem was, he was busy runnin’ the farm plus
the business that was Carpenter Bee Tree Farms.
She’d been readin’ through one of the oldest journals. It
was written by Judah Carpenter, one of the original four brothers. It was full
of little details like the price of lumber they sold, cost of nails, lead for
bullets, salt an’ such.
Judah’s handwritin’ was archaic an’ difficult to make out at
times. It was also frank an’ honest. Judah left out few details about the life
of his family an’ his brothers.
Aunt Bess had a pot of coffee on when Joe Henry came in. He
seldom waited to enter. He usually knocked as he came in the door. She also had
a pan of butter rolls that were fresh out of the oven. They was Joe Henry’s
favorites.
“Grab some coffee an’ get one of them butter rolls. Save a
couple for Rachel. She’ll be whippin’ me an’ you if she finds out you ate ‘em
all.”
Joe Henry grinned. His Great Aunt Bess knew him well. He
filled his mug with coffee an’ poured in some fresh cream. The whole clan
enjoyed the fresh milk an’ cream that Lottie an’ Gene provided from the milk
cows down the way.
He found the kitchen spoon Aunt Bess had layin’ by the pan
of butter rolls. He also saw the small plate she’d set out. He put that plate
away an’ took a bowl instead. He dished two butter rolls into the bowl an’
poured a generous helpin’ of cream over top.
“Look here nephew. This is our ancestor, Daniel. He was
David Carpenter’s second son. Judah was the oldest. Abraham an’ Jacob were
twins. They was next. Isham, the son who stayed home was the least of the boys.
Rachel is descended from him. There were two girls too.”
“Aunt Bess, looky there. You spelled his wife’s name wrong.
Her name was ‘Cody’. I’ve seen it written down. Cody.” He pointed out.
“No, Joe Henry. We always thought her name was Cody. Never
knew where that name came from. It weren’t her name. Right there, where I added
her to the timeline, with Daniel’s, that is what Daniel called her. ‘Koby’ was
her nickname that Daniel, our ancestor, called her. Her name was Shikoba.” Aunt
Bess explained.
“Shikoba? Are you sure?” Joe Henry was puzzled.
Aunt Bess smiled an’ nodded. “Yes, I’m sure. It was in another
journal, not Judah’s. It was in the journal Daniel kept. Koby, Shikoba, eventually
kept one also. It’s not as full of information as Daniel’s was. English was her
second language, after all. Judah’s was best. In his journal he confirms what
Daniel wrote in his journal. Her name was Shikoba.”
Joe Henry was still puzzled. “What was her last name? What
sort of name is that?”
“Our ancestor, I needed to count how many greats. She was my
second Great Grandmother, your fourth. One generation or another, she is our
Great Grandma several times removed. Shikoba didn’t have a last name. That is,
as far as I can tell. You see, she was a full-blooded Choctaw woman. There’s a
lot to the story, Joe Henry. I’m still piecin’ it together. Daniel an’ Shikoba,
Koby or Cody as we know her, were married when they were both sixteen.” Aunt
Bess explained.
“That is so young.” Joe Henry said.
“Not that young back then. Oh, an’ her first son, our
ancestor, our line, was one of them miracle babies.” Aunt Bess said with a
smile.
Joe Henry wasn’t sure of that. “Miracle baby?”
“Yep, only took him seven months to be born.” She answered.
Joe Henry blushed an grinned. “Aunt Bess. Shame.”
76.
Daniel couldn’t wait to find his brother Judah. Though they
were a year apart, they’d grown up together an’ were the dearest of friends.
Judah understood the heartache Daniel suffered as he thought of Shikoba
leavin’, never to return.
Daniel spoke of it often. Judah had listened an’ had great
sympathy for his younger brother. There weren’t so very many families anywhere
close to the Carpenter homestead. For that reason alone, the chances of findin’
a wife nearby was slim for most young men.
It was hard to imagine a beautiful, intelligent young woman
the same age as Daniel goin’ home to be married to a man twice her age. Daniel
hadn’t grown up in a culture where arranged marriages were common.
When Shikoba explained to Daniel that she had no say in the
arrangement he was taken aback. They’d known each other for a number of years.
The man Shikoba was to marry was twice her age of sixteen.
Both Shikoba an’ Daniel thought that to be ancient.
Daniel ran toward the barn. He’d seen Judah there before he went
to sit with all the adults an’ learn his fate. He couldn’t wait to tell his
brother the news.
He was a little embarrassed to tell Judah why he was allowed
to marry Shikoba. He knew Judah was just a mite stronger in his convictions
about marriage, sex an’ so on. Their Mama taught them to read by usin’ their
family Bible. Both not only learned to read an’ write but also were good at
cipherin’ an’ numbers.
Judah loved to read. He would sit out on the porch with the
Bible an’ study it for hours when he had free time. Though both young men knew
themselves to be Christian, Judah’s faith was strong an’ his obedience to
Biblical commands stronger in his daily life.
That’s not to say Daniel was a heathen or some such. He too
had a strong faith. He just considered himself to be a little more circumspect
in how he lived his faith.
When Daniel ran into the barn, he surprised Judah as he
shouted. Judah jumped an’ turned.
“Don’t do that, brother. You just about scared me to death.”
Judah said.
Daniel laughed. “You won’t believe it. You just won’t
believe it, Judah. I am so excited.”
“Excited about what?”
“I’m goin’ to marry Shikoba. She doesn’t have to leave. She
doesn’t have to marry that ol’ man back at her village. She’s goin’ to marry me
tomorrow! Tomorrow, brother.” Daniel said as he grabbed his brother’s hands an’
spun both of them around.
Judah was confused. He stopped Daniel an’ asked. “Marry
Shikoba? Tomorrow? How? She’s to be married to that man back in their village.
How did this happen?”
Daniel got real serious. “Judah, I know you won’t approve. I
know we was wrong. But Judah, I love her. We wanted to share our love just one
time, big brother. Shikoba is goin’ to have a son. My son.”
“An’ they know? She told her family?” Judah asked.
“Her Grandmother knew. She’s dyin’ so she sees things When
she was talkin’ with Shikoba, she knew. She even knows we’ll have a boy. We’ll
have other youngin’s too. That’s what she saw, what she said.” Daniel explained.
He expected Judah to be upset with him. He expected to be
lectured by his big brother. Instead, Judah asked many questions. Daniel told
him all the details of the gatherin’ of family.
Judah listened quietly.
The Judah said, “I’m glad for you, brother. I don’t approve
of how it happened. I am glad for both of you. I know she loves you. I
definitely know you love her. I am glad for you.”
77.
All of Teneca’s clan were also findin’ time to say their
farewells. Though the ol’ blind woman was not Nita’s grandmother, they had
always been close. When she was a little girl, Nita learned that Shikoba’s
grandmother loved honey. Settlers introduced European honeybees into the
continent several generations before. Though the settlers did their best to
practice good beekeepin’, their hives often swarmed in the spring. Those swarms
slowly began to populate newly settled areas along with the European settlers.
Several of the tribes in what became Virginia, Tennessee as
well as suroundin’ areas called the honeybees “White man’s flies”. They were
afraid of the insects that stung. The tribes were, of course, familiar with native
stingin’ insects, bumblebees, waspers, hornets an’ such.
The honeybee was something new, unexpected. At first, few
could imagine an insect providin’ the wonderful sweet harvest of honey.
Bumblebees were in the same family but only produced miniscule amounts of honey
to sustain their bumblebee queen through winter each year. Their nest are
underground. There are perhaps dozens of bumblebees in a nest. Wasps, hornets,
even yellow jackets are in a different family of insects and do not produce
honey.
At some time in her life, Shikoba’s grandmother tasted honey.
She found it to be delightful. When the clan would be close to a bee tree, she
would beg young braves to climb up an’ bring her combs of honey. A few did.
Most did not.
Shikoba was not willin’ to try for her grandmother. She left
that task to the braves. Problem was, even the braves weren’t so brave in the
face of them stingin’ monsters.
Nita often sat at the feet Shikoba’s grandmother to hear the
ancient tales of their tribe. Durin’ one of those visits, Shikoba’s grandmother
gave her a little taste, just a small piece of honeycomb.
That did it for her. The taste of honey on her tongue made
her braver. Like Shikoba’s grandmother, Nita was amazed by the delightful taste
of honey.
Back then, Nita heard that the bees could be temporarily
stunned with smoke.
Nita determined to watch an’ learn to rob them hives. She
quizzed the few young braves that did rob bee trees. They showed her how to
twist bundles of green sweet grasses an’ light those to make thick smoke. That
was the key.
Nita found a bee tree close to where the clan was campin’.
Rather than tellin’ the young men, she determined to rob the tree herself.
There was a big hole in the tree about eight feet off the ground. She spied a
branch she could sit on to reach in an’ rob the hive.
Nita made her plans. She took a long butcher knife that
belonged to her Mama, Talli. She went alone to the bee tree. Along the way she twisted
a bundle of sweet grasses around a long stick. She carried a basket lined with
broad leaves as well as her flint an’ steel.
Once at the tree, she watched. She’d been stung once. She
didn’t relish the thought of bein’ stung. However, she was young, determined
an’ hungry for that sweetnin’. It was early in the day. She suspected most of
the worker bees would be out gatherin’ nectar an’ pollen. (Of course, she
didn’t know what nectar or pollen was.)
She carefully lit the bundle of sweet grasses. Once it began
to smolder, she held it close to the openin’ in the tree. She noticed the bees
did seem to slow down as they went in an’ out of the tree. She then climbed up
onto the nearby branch.
So far, so good.
She held the smolderin’ bundle close to the openin’. After a
moment she peered in. There, right there within inches was long, beautiful
honeycombs. She held the bundle in the openin’. That caused the bees to move
away from the smoke. It fascinated her that the worker bees began to plunge
their heads into the open cells of the combs.
She brought the smokin’ grass bundle out an’ then close
again.
Nita quickly moved the bundle to her left hand. She took the
butcher knife out of the belt at her waist. She realized she couldn’t cut the
comb, catch it an’ hold the smolderin’ sweet grasses.
She laid the bundle at the edge of the hole an’ reached in
with both hands. She carefully cut several long hunks of honey comb that fell
into her left hand.
Then a bee landed on her arm. She jerked when the bee stung
her forearm. The bundle fell to the ground an’ was extinguished. She realized
she was in trouble as the bees began to move toward the cut comb.
Nita quickly turned an’ jumped down. She laid the comb on
top the broad leaves in her basket. There was nowhere to wash the honey off her
hands so she turned an’ ran toward the creek. There was a tiny waterfall there.
She paused to wash her hands. She then found several more large leaves that she
covered the honeycomb with.
She ran toward the camp. Problem was, she had to run past
the bee tree. Them critters was riled up. They smelled their robbed harvest as
she ran past. A dozen or more found Nita an’ stung her as she ran.
She ran right into Shikoba’s grandmother. The ol’ woman had
a buffalo hide rug wrapped around her shoulders. Nita cried for help an’ the
ol’ woman pulled Nita into the robe. She covered Nita an’ herself with the robe
till them last few honeybees finally gave up.
When she opened the robe, Nita told her what was in the
basket. They walked to the ol’ woman’s place in the camp an’ sat. Nita’s
grandmother found a small twist of tobacco in her things. She broke off a piece
an’ began to swiftly chew the tobacco. Once it was chewed well, she rubbed it
on the bee stings. It took a while, but the applied tobacco juices calmed down
the pain an’ itch of the stings.
Once Nita had some relief, she was instructed to take her
Mama’s knife back an’ return. Once she returned the two of them sat an’ ate
that treasured honey. They chewed on the honeycomb, laughed an’ giggled at the
adventure Nita had.
An adventure even the bravest men refused to attempt.
78.
Nita had asked permission to visit with Shikoba’s
grandmother. Talli told her not to wear the ol’ woman out. Nita found her
reclinin’ on a rolled-up buffalo hide blanket.
“Grandmother,” she said. (For she always called the ol’
woman grandmother) “It’s Nita. Are you awake?”
“Yes, child. I do not sleep often. I only have a few days
left. I will not sleep them away. Come. Sit.”
Nita did so. She settled in close. “Grandmother, I brought
you a small piece of honeycomb. Can you eat?”
The ol’ woman coughed, then chuckled. She held out her hand
toward Nita. “I can always have a taste of honey.”
Nita had a small piece of honeycomb wrapped in a leaf. The
ol’ woman took it but held onto Nita’s hand for ever so long. She turned her
blind eyes toward Nita with a quizzical look.
She didn’t say anything when she let Nita’s hand go. She
lifted the honeycomb to her mouth an’ took several small bites. Nita could tell
she was savorin’ each morsel.
Then she handed the rest to Nita. “Here child, eat the rest.
I will enjoy chewin’ on the comb as we visit. Unless the Creator chooses
differently, we will not speak again. But today, just now, we talk.”
Nita took the small fragment of honeycomb. She carefully bit
the comb out of the leaf so as not to get the sticky sweet honey on her hands.
They both sat an’ chewed on the honeycomb.
“Do you know what I like best about eatin’ the honeycomb?”
the ol’ woman asked.
Nita shook her head. “No Grandmother, what do you like
best?”
“It is difficult to find a bee tree. Difficult to rob the
tree. One must pay a price for the honeycomb. Not all are willin’ to pay the
price. What I like best is the effort it takes to eat a piece of honeycomb.”
Nita laughed. “Yes, I am the only woman who tries. Many of
the braves are not so brave as to face the tiny warriors in the bee tree.”
“You are indeed a brave young woman.”
“No, Grandmother. I am not. I am like a leaf fallin’ on the
water. A leaf driftin’ with the current. I’m not brave.” Nita said with a
discouraged voice.
“So, you go back to our village in the spring? You go to be
married?”
Nita smiled. “That is how it is. How it always has been. It
has been decided for me, just as it was for my Mama Isa an’ even her mother,
Apokni. As it was for you. They are happy. Apokni loves Kimeya. Mama Isa loves
Teneca. They say it is a good thing.”
“A leaf driftin’ on the water. Give me your hands again,
child.”
Nita did give the ol’ woman her hands. It was a long moment
before she let go.
“Little one, you are braver than you imagine. You are loved
by me. You could not be closer to my heart if you were my own granddaughter.
But I must rest.”
She paused for several moments. “Child, I must say my
farewell to your grandmother, Apokni. I have great need to speak to her. Would
you ask her to come.” The ol’ blind woman said as she lay back.
79.
Nita was cryin’ as she left the ol’ woman’s side. It was
difficult for her to realize she’d never spend time with the ol’ woman again.
She quickly found her grandmother an’ passed along the
message. Apokni planned to visit anyways. She made a cup of tea steeped with willow
bark as well as pain killin’ medicines that she was to take to relieve the ol’
woman’s pain.
She went in an’ sat, handin’the tea to the ol’ woman who
drank it down.
“Sister friend, we must talk. Talk as sisters, friends an’
dreamers.”
Apokni nodded, forgettin’ the ol’ woman couldn’t see her
with her blind eyes.
“There is much I need to say, Apokni. Listen to my heart.
Listen, for I’ve seen things.”
Apokni’s eyes widened. “I listen, sister.”
For almost an hour the two women spoke. They whispered
often. Sometimes they chuckled together.
Finally, Apokni stood.
“I need to find my husband. I need to speak to him now.” She
said.
“He will listen. You know what you must tell him. He will
understand. If you need my help, send him to me.”
Apokni nodded, knowin’ the ol’ woman’s blind eyes could not
see her noddin’.
She knelt an’ hugged the ol’ woman. Then she left to find
Kimeya.
“Husband, walk with me.” She said.
He rose, staff in hand. She held out her arm an’ he took her
elbow.
“We have much to speak about. Let’s walk to the top of the
ridge. Much to say.” Apokni said quietly.
Kimeya knew the path well enough to walk it with his blind
eyes an’ his staff. However, because they were deep in their conversation, he
allowed Apokni to help him as they walked. Now an’ again he paused an’ looked
with his blind eyes at his wife.
As she spoke, he was quiet. When they arrived at the top of
the ridge he pointed in the direction of a fallen tree. He often sat there when
he walked to the top of the ridge.
“She has seen this? She knows it to be? Is it the right
thing, wife?” he asked.
Apokni was silent for a moment. “Yes. It is. She has seen
it. I do not have eyes to see as she does, but I have a heart that tells me it
is right. What do you see, my husband?”
Kimeya sat for a long time. He didn’t answer. Every time he
heard a bird sing, he turned his head in that direction. When the wind pushed
through the trees, he would raise his head as if to catch its whisper.
He stood, held out his arm an’ gripped his staff. “We go.
Much to do. It saddens me. I’ve heard the Blackbirds call my name. The wind
tells me the course we must take. Some will not understand.”
“I know, husband. But it is right.” Apokni said.
He smiled an’ wrapped his arm around Apokni. “It is right.”
80.
At the bottom of the hill Apokni an’ Kimeya turned. They
didn’t turn toward their camp but toward the Carpenter homestead. Both knew the
path well. Over the last weeks the path which had only been a game trail, had
become well-traveled.
They spoke as they walked.
Kimeya asked, “Are you sure, wife?”
Apokni hesitated, “I’ve told you.”
“I am not sure David Carpenter will understand. He is a
practical man. He dreams, but is not a dreamer. We must also call Teneca an’
Isa, Nita’s parents.” Kimeya said.
Apokni reached with her left hand an’ squeezed her husband’s
forearm. “Teneca an’ Isa will listen to us. David Carpenter will listen to
Selby Carpenter’s heart. She is a dreamer, Kimeya. She does not know but she is
a dreamer. David Carpenter is more of a dreamer than you know. More than he
knows. He would not have brought his family to this place if he had not
dreamed. They will know we must do the right thing.”
Kimeya called out an’ was answered by Teneca. He told Teneca
to bring Isa to the Carpenter cabin.
Selby was on the porch when she saw the old Choctaw couple
comin’. She waved to Apokni. Apokni waved back. Then she saw Teneca an’ Isa
approach.
“I’m goin’ in to put the coffee pot back on. Come in an’
warm up.” She called.
Once the four arrived at the front porch, Selby was back out
an’ waitin’.
“Come in. Get warm. I stoked the fire. Let’s sit an’ drink
coffee.” She said.
“Yes. Good. Call David.” Kimeya said.
Selby seated her guests an’ went back to the porch. “Yoo,
David. Company.”
David was in the barn with Judah an’ the twins. The younger
boys was cleanin’ out the stalls. They were carefully shovelin’ the straw an’
muck into a wheelbarrow. Once it was full, they would roll it out back to the
pile of compostin’ straw an’ manure.
He told Judah to take over an’ told the twins to finish. He
knew that if Judah weren’t right there them twins might wander off before the
task was complete.
He made his way to the cabin. Once inside he greeted their
four visitors. He grabbed a mug of coffee an’ joined them at the fire.
The two older Choctaw folks didn’t have the grasp of the
English language that their children an’ grandchildren had. Apokni was more
fluent than Kimeya. David was better with their language than Selby.
This day the six were able to use both languages as well as
some signin’ to ponder an’ talk.
Kimeya surprised David an’ Selby with a simple statement.
David wasn’t sure of what Kimeya an’ Apokni suggested. “Are
you sure? She told you she knew?”
“It is as she told me. The ol’ woman saw it. That is the way
it must be. We must all agree. It will be painful but it must be done.” Apokni
answered.
David shook his head. “I don’t know. Someone is goin’ to get
hurt if she’s wrong, I’m afraid. I don’t feel good about it.”
The followin’ discussion surprised David. His mind was a
more practical one. It didn’t put Selby off guard. She smiled as first Kimeya
an’ then Apokni spoke. Now an’ again David would fill in some of the discussion
for his wife. He was taken off guard by what was discussed.
Teneca an’ Isa were as surprised as David an’ Selby. They
listened an’ agreed with Kimeya as to what must be done.
They talked for so long their coffee grew cold.
Finally, David spoke. “Yes. Alright. I agree. I don’t like
it. If she knew an’ told you. If she was wrong… Don’t know that the vision is
true, but I understand that for your tribe you believe it to be true.”
Kimeya held out his hand. David grasped his forearm an’ they
held tight for a moment.
“We speak to them now.” Kimeya said.
81.
David rose an’ went to the cabin door. He looked toward the
barn an’ called for Judah.
“Abraham, Jacob, y’all finish muckin’ them stalls. I need
you, Judah. Apokni said to walk down an’ find Nita. Ask her to come here too.”
Judah wasn’t sure why his Daddy wanted him. He knew Kimeya, Apokni,
Teneca an’ Isa was visitin’ with his folks, but wasn’t sure why they wanted to
see him or Nita.
He walked down the long path toward the Choctaw clan’s
winter camp. He was about half way there when he heard somethin’. He paused to
listen.
As he listened, he realized it was Nita. She was off to the
side of the trail an’ was cryin’. He quickly pushed through the faint deer trail.
Nita was sittin’ by a tiny little waterfall. There was a tiny stream of water
that trickled down the side of the hill an’ over several rock ledges in that
clearin’. Him an’ Nita heard the song of that little waterfall one day as they
walked between the two homes.
When they found the little waterfall, they made it one of
their favorite places. They would often stop, if just for a moment, to stand,
watch an’ listen to the sound.
There is somethin’ pure, peaceful in the music of fallin’
water. No matter how small the trickle, it calmed one’s spirit.
“Nita, your grandparents an’ your parents are at Daddy’s
cabin. They told me to find you an’ come.” He told Nita.
“Why?” she asked.
Judah shook his head. “I’m not sure. Daddy called for me
too. He chuckled. “I’ve not done anythin’ that would get me in trouble. They
probably want us to watch the youngin’s while the old folks go off somewhere.”
Nita wiped her eyes. “Do not tell them you found me cryin’,
Judah.”
Her time spent with Shikoba’s grandmother was heavy on her
heart.
They walked side by side. More than once Judah looked over
at Nita. He was troubled by her tears.
When they arrived at the Carpenter cabin, he opened the door
an’ allowed Nita to go in first.
Though Judah had told her, she thought it odd to see her
parents, Teneca an’ Isa as well as Kimeya an’ Apokni, her grandparents sittin’
an’ waitin’.
“Sit.” Her grandfather commanded.
Apokni spoke next. “We cannot say all in English. Teneca an’
Isa, will speak for us. David an’ Selby will speak also.”
She looked stern, almost angry.
“Nita, you were to be married when we returned to our
village in the spring. Now, now that vow, that promise, that marriage cannot
happen. Your grandfather an’ I have been forced to make a decision. We will
lose face in out village but it must be.” Teneca said in the Choctaw language.
David an’ Selby were quiet at that point. Judah was lost by
the conversation. Oh, he understood what Teneca said just fine. He just didn’t
know what Nita had done.
Nita was confused. “What have I done, Father?”
Kimeya spoke then, “Nita, you understand what we are sayin’.
We know you an’ Shikoba have both shamed us. We will return home in the spring
an’ make things right. It will cost us much to appease the other families.”
Judah had been followin’ the conversation. He was terribly
confused, concerned. He knew it weren’t his place, but he spoke up. He should
not interfere in clan matters. He was an outsider.
“What has Nita done? She’s not shamed anyone. She is good.
She is…” he said, his face turnin’ red.
Apokni reached to take her husband’s hand. She spoke
sternly, “We know. I have spoken with Shikoba’s grandmother. She told me what
she saw. She had a vision of you, Nita. She knew an’ she told me. We must
return home to make amends for what you have done.”
David was leanin’ toward Selby an’ translatin’ as best he
could.
Judah was becomin’ not only confused but angry. He sat an’
listened but wasn’t sure why they’d been accused.
“Me? What vision? What have I done? How have I shamed out
families?” Nita asked.
Kimeya shifted his blind eyes toward his son. He nodded
toward Judah. Teneca understood an’ took over.
“You know the vision that Shikoba’s grandmother had. You
know Shikoba is with child. You know the
vision was true. We were not surprised at Shikoba an’ Daniel. They both were
always doin’ what they should not. They do not think before they do. They must
marry because she is with child. She can no longer marry the man she was to
marry. He would not accept her or her child by Daniel. That is why she must
marry Daniel.” Teneca explained in a calm voice.
Nita just about burst with her question. “What does that to
do with me? With Judah?”
Teneca looked to Selby as the adults had planned.
Selby had a calm look on her face as she took up the
conversation. “Nita, we know. It cannot be hidden any longer. You too are goin’ to have a baby. We’ve been
told it is so. Shikoba’s grandmother has seen this. She told your grandmother,
Apokni what she saw when she was with you. She told your grandmother what path
we must take. You an’ Judah must marry also. None of us are happy about this.
We will do what is best for your baby though. Your family has no other choice.
We all want to do what’s right. Shikoba’s grandmother has seen this. You two will
marry at the same time as Shikoba an’ Daniel.”
Nita began cryin’. “No! No! I am not… We have not.”
The two young people were shocked by Selby’s words, “Shikoba’s
grandmother told Apokni. She knew about you the same way she knew about
Shikoba. She had a vision when she held your hands. She knew. You are goin’ to
have a child with Judah.”
“It is what you two must do, Judah. You have no choice now
but to marry Nita. You have to make it right, son.” David said quietly.
Judah rose. His face was flushed. He was angry. “No. No,
that is not true. Don’t talk about Nita like that. She is wonderful. She is
good. She an’ I… I did not… Well, we did not. We wouldn’t shame or disgrace…”
He had tears in his eyes as he turned. He quickly walked out
of the cabin. The twins saw him walkin’ back toward the mountain that rose
behind the homestead.
Nita was up an’ runnin’ out the door also. She was cryin’ as
she ran.
82.
The six older folks sat for ever so long after Judah an’
Nita ran out. No one spoke.
Kimeya was the first. In broken English he said, “He loves
her David Carpenter. He is angry.”
David smiled a careful smile. He nodded, then spoke first in
English an’ then in a broken Choctaw.
“Yes, he loves her. But Kimeya, I don’t feel good about what
we’ve done.” He said.
Then Isa, Nita’s mother spoke. “Perhaps we are wrong to do
what we’ve done. We all know what the old woman told Apokni. Vision or not. I
just don’t know. What if the vision was wrong? What if we had no right pour
shame on my daughter? What if we hadn’t done this? Was there really no other
way?”
Apokni said, “Our traditions are many generations old, Isa.
It is difficult to disobey them. Neither Shikoba or Nita wanted to marry the older
men that bargained for them. Both men are twice their ages. The vision was not
about them avoidin’ the arranged marriages. It was about them, their children
an’future generations. Shikoba’s grandmother saw how it was to be. She told me
Nita would have a child with Judah. That she was sure of. There was no doubt. We
spent long moments together. She told me what we must do. She told me what she
had seen. There was only one way to make it so. There was only this way.”
Kimeya was quiet for a moment. He had an’ odd look in his
blind eyes.
Then he asked, “Only this way? Woman, she said Nita was with
child?”
“It is as I’ve said. She said Nita would have a child with
Judah. She saw Judah an’ Nita would marry.” Apokni answered carefully.
“But she did say Nita was with child?” he asked again.
“She said Nita would have a child with Judah. She told me Nita
will have a child with Judah. I said what I said, ol’ man. You need to stop.
You know the man she was to marry will not marry her if she’s been with another
man.” Apokni said with a troubled look.
David continued to translate for Selby.
Teneca said, “Perhaps we are wrong. Perhaps this is not the
right path.”
Apokni shook her head. “No, she said Nita will have a child
with Judah. The old woman has seen it.”
Kimeya was quiet. It was as if he was listenin’ for somethin’
outside the cabin. He turned his head. Though he was blind, his eyes seemed to
look deep into the eyes of his wife. He wasn’t sure of what his spirit saw. He
wasn’t sure of what his wife, Apokni said.
He stood an’ walked to the door. He opened the door an’
stood, as if lookin’ into the distance. He bend his head forward as if tryin’
to hear a far away voice.
Apokni joined him.
He spoke to his wife in low tones. “Apokni, she said they
have been together?”
“Husband, you ask too many questions. I have told you.”
“She told you Nita was with child?” he asked carefully.
“She told me Nita will have a child with Judah. Be still
now, husband.” Apokni answered.
“Apokni…” he started.
“Kimeya, I told you what you need to hear. What we all need
to hear. It will save face for you.”
Then he nodded. He understood.
“Nita will have a child with Judah, Apokni. That is truth. I
hear the truth in that. That is the path you have led us onto. But is it the
path we should have taken? It has not have happened, has it, wife? I
understand, it will be so. But wife, what you have said troubles me. This is
the path you have chosen.” He said quietly.
“It is the path that saves face, husband.”
He turned an’ looked at Apokni for a long moment with his
blind eyes. She turned her head away from his searchin’ eyes.
Finally, Kimeya an’ Apokni rejoined the others.
They all sat quiet.
“Will it be difficult for you? For your family if the girls
do not return? Do not marry those men?” Selby asked.
“Yes, it will be difficult. We will lose face in the tribe.
Not as much as could be lost.”
The conversations took a while as they had to translate in
an’ out of the two languages.
Selby then asked, “What does that mean?”
Kimeya shrugged. “It does not matter. What we’ve done is done.
It is how it is supposed to be. If both girls have been with other men the
arrangement is broken by their indiscretion.”
David shook his head, “This is so uncomfortable for me. What
if this is wrong? What if both girls have not been with my sons? You don’t know
my Judah like I do. He’s so much like me. He’s not much for visions an’ such,
Kimeya. He has a good heart. He’s careful with his beliefs. He will not agree.
He says they have not been together. We have accused them of being together. He
doesn’t understand what you have said nor what we’ve planned. He won’t believe
the vision. He loves her, but he’ll not allow shame to fall on Nita. He wouldn’t
do so. I don’t think he’s been with Nita. I don’t think he’ll agree. He’ll want
to do what is right by Nita, by your family an’ your tradition. He will not
allow Nita to bear shame. He would not shame her by sleeping with her. Kimeya,
I don’t feel good about visions forcing their hands in this. Yes, I do know
there is love between them. I just don’t know that this path is right.”
Kimeya sat quiet with his face turned toward David
Carpenter. After a moment he turned toward Apokni an’ looked long an’ hard at
his wife. There was a battle goin’ on in his mind an’ in his spirit.
Kimeya rose. “My brother, come. We must go find your son. You
must tell him to marry Nita. Teneca, come with us. You are Nita’s father. We must
tell him Nita is to marry him. It must be so. I do not doubt that part of the
vision. I have heard the whispers of truth in that. We have much to say to him.
To both of them. He will agree. He must agree. We do not have much time.”
He turned toward Isa “Isa, you an’ Selby Carpenter find
Nita. You talk with her. It will be as I say. It is the way it is supposed to
be. She may be easier to persuade. She is to marry Judah.”
Isa shook her head. “I understand, but she is hurt, Kimeya.
She heard our accusations. Even though it is for her good, she is deeply hurt.
She does not understand why we would accuse her.”
Kimeya, Teneca an’ David was finally out an’ lookin’ around
the homestead. David asked the twins about Judah. They pointed up the mountain.
David told Kimeya the direction they must go. The three walked side by side up
the trail.
At the top of the trail, David saw his son sittin’ about six
feet off the ground on a branch in a big hickory tree. He’d suspected his son
would be there. That had been Judah’s favorite spot to sit an’ ponder since he
was a little boy.
The three older men walked close. Judah did not move nor
look down at them. David started to say somethin’ but Kimeya took him by the
arm an’ shook his head. They just stood there for a long time.
“Judah, do you hear the wind? It whispers through the
mountains. It calls to those who will listen. The Blackbirds have been singin’
the whole time we walked up this path. I’ve been listenin’ to their song.
They’ve told me what they’ve tried to sing to you. You’ve sat quiet, but have
you heard?. Forget your anger for a moment an’ listen. I’ve been listenin’.
Just listen.” Kimeya said softly.
83.
No one spoke for a long moment. The older men just stood,
waitin’. Kimeya occasionally tilted his head as he listened.
“Judah, come down. Come down now.” His Daddy said.
The tone of David’s voice caused Judah to obey. It was that
tone that Judah knew was a command, not a suggestion.
He climbed down an’ stood facin’ away from the older men.
Judah wasn’t ready to listen to anyone, especially the men
that came up the hill. He was bitter an’ angry that he’d been accused, that
Nita had been shamed. He didn’t want to talk. He didn’t want to even look at
his Daddy, Teneca or Kimeya.
Kimeya couldn’t see Judah. He could, however, hear him as he
breathed in an’ out.
He stepped close an’ dropped his walkin’ staff. He then felt
an’ took Judah’s arms into his strong hands.
“You will listen.” He said in Choctaw. Kimeya used the
inflections in his voice that was a command. He knew Judah understood.
Kimeya’s blind eyes looked into Judah’s face, searchin’.
Judah refused at first to look at Kimeya.
Teneca spoke from where he stood, “Judah, you must hear us.
You must listen. If you love my daughter, an’ I believe you do, you must hear
us.
Around them there were blackbirds singin’. The wind continually
whispered through the branches of the trees. Kimeya tilted his head again as if
to hear some message.
“Judah, help me sit. Find my staff.” He told Judah.
Judah helped Kimeya sit on a log. Kimeya took hold of
Judah’s arm, forced him to sit on his left. David an’ Teneca sat on Kimeya’s
right.
“Do you love my Granddaughter, Judah? You’ve known her for
many years. You played together as children. You’ve walked side by side as
you’ve grown up. Do you love her?” Kimeya asked in a soft voice.
Judah’s understandin’ of the Choctaw language was good. He
knew exactly what Kimeya was askin’. David didn’t have the broad understandin’
that Judah had. He did understand most of what Kimeya asked just then.
Judah became teary eyed. “Don’t matter none. I know your
customs. She’s promised to some man back in your village. I didn’t sleep with
her. I wouldn’t do that. It ain’t right. Ain’t fittin’. I’ll have me a wife
someday, not just ‘cause I fooled around with her. I’ll do it the right way.”
“You have not heard me correctly. Do you love my
Granddaughter, Judah.” Kimeya asked softly.
Judah got frustrated. He looked at the old man, “I told you,
don’t matter…”
Teneca asked, “Judah, my father asked but you do not answer.
Do you love Nita?”
Judah began to cry. He sobbed. “Yes. Alright? I always have
loved her. Yes, I love her. I love her an’ that’s why I didn’t, I wouldn’t
shame her by doin’ what y’all accuse me of.”
The four sat for a while. All the time they sat Kimeya
listened to the wind.
“Friend David, I cannot find all the right words for Judah.
You an’ Teneca must.” Kimeya said.
David nodded. “Judah, my son. You’ve spoken many times to
Shikoba’s grandmother.”
Judah just nodded. He had no idea why that was even
mentioned.
“Yes. So?” he asked.
David spoke, “She’s dyin’. Judah. The believe she is a seer.
Her people respect her visions. They respect who she is, what she sees. She saw
you. She saw Nita. She saw you together as husband an’ wife. She told Apokni
this.”
Judah was confused. “Well, sure she’s seen us. We both
visited with her. She’s seen us. She can’t have seen me as Nita’s husband. I
ain’t for that.”
David nodded an’ said slowly. “Son, I’m not sure about all
that sort of thing. Not into dreams an’ visions. But your Mama heard what was told
to Apokni. She told me it was true. She knew it in her heart.”
“What are you talkin’ about, Daddy? That’s crazy talk.”
Judah said impatiently.
“Son, that ol’ blind woman saw a future for you an’ Nita.
She knew Shikoba was goin’ to have a baby an’ she is. She was right. She knew. She
also saw that you an’ Nita would have a child. That Nita would marry you, not
someone back at their village. Why is that any different?” David explained.
84.
Judah was strugglin’ with all that had been said. He was
deeply upset that he’d been accused of bein’ with Nita, sleepin’ with her. He
weren’t the sort to do such. He considered himself an honorable man, a good man.
He’d read the Bible an’ knew it were wrong to do so.
Yes, he did love Nita. He grew up with her. He cherished
every moment he’d ever spent with her. For just a moment, he had half a smile
as he remembered her callin’ out to him time an’ again, “Catch me if you can.”
“Catch me if you can…”
Problem was, she weren’t his. She weren’t catchable.
She was promised to someone already. Arrangements was made
when she was a little bitty girl. Her family wouldn’t go against that tribal
tradition an’ custom. He knew enough about the Choctaw people to know her
family would lose face if Nita didn’t marry that older man. Forget that he was
twice her age. Didn’t matter none. It was already set. Already planned.
“Daddy, you know I ain’t much for all that carryin’ on.
Ain’t much for no dreams an’ visions an’ such. No matter how I feel about Nita,
it just ain’t fittin’. They have to do what they planned.” Judah said to his
Daddy.
“Judah, didn’t you say you love Nita?” David asked his son.
Judah shook his head. His face was grim. “Don’t matter what
I think or feel, Daddy.”
“Judah, I heard you. You said you love Nita” David asked
again.
“Daddy…”
Kimeya leaned close. He might not have a broad understandin’
of the English language but he was able to follow the conversation. He held out
his hand an’ touched Judah’s arm.
“Judah, didn’t you say you love my granddaughter?” he asked.
“Kimeya…” Judah started.
“You are avoidin’ our questions. We ask again. Didn’t you
tell us you love my daughter?” Teneca asked.
Judah started cryin’ real hard. “Yes, alright? I already
told you. I told you I do. Yes, I do love her. She is all I think about. When
Daniel talked about runnin’ off with Shikoba, I thought about runnin’ off with Nita.
I asked her. She wouldn’t go. That’s not how me or Nita are. She’ll do what’s
right by her family. I will too. We can’t be married. Can’t be. I won’t do
nothin’ that’s wrong like sleepin’ with her. Not even if it means we have to
get married. I can’t. It ain’t in me.”
He repeated that as best he could in both English an’
Choctaw so’s all three men would understand the battle that was bein’ fought
within his soul. It was the battle of a good man, tryin’ to do the right thing.
David, Teneca an’ Kimeya sat silent. Judah stood, stepped
away an’ was lookin’ out over the mountains.
Kimeya turned toward David. He took David’s arm an’ motioned
toward Judah. David stood an’ helped Kimeya’s stand. They walked close to
Judah. Teneca rose an’ followed.
“Friend David, in your customs, if all was well, how would
Judah marry Nita?” Kimeya asked.
David pondered for a moment. “Well sir, we don’t have no
preacher anywhere close. That’d be ideal way. We’d have a preacher marry them.
It just don’t happen like that here in the wilderness. Usually, folks just have
some sort of agreement. Write it down in a family Bible. Sometimes they have
some sort of ceremony. Family member might do some sort of blessin’ on the
couple to make it official.”
Kimeya nodded. “Yes. That is good.”
85.
Kimeya asked Teneca to come closer to Judah.
Then he said, “Judah, my friend. Turn. Look at me.”
Judah stood lookin’ away into the mountains for a moment. He
finally turned to Kimeya. His eyes was red an’ tears still streamed down his
face. Kimeya placed a hand on each of Judah’s shoulders. He stood silent for a
moment. His blind eyes seemed to search Judah’s face.
“Judah friend, son of my friend David Carpenter, know this.
I hear things you do not hear. I see things you do not see. I was told you will
take my granddaughter as your wife. You will have children. You will have my
great grandchildren. Shikoba’s grandmother has seen this. In our tribe, with
our customs, if a woman is with child she cannot be given to another man. It is
our way, Judah. I trust our ways. You must trust them.” Kimeya said quietly.
“But…” Judah started.
“Shhh. Be at peace, my friend. You don’t have to understand.
You don’t have to believe. I believe for you. I have heard the blackbird sing.
I have heard the whispers of the wind. This is good. It is the way it is
supposed to be. I have seen what my wife, Apokni hasn’t said. Yes, I heard what
she said. I’ve seen what she was told. Though she heard one thing she said
another. We must obey the original vision, not what Apokni told us. We must be
true to that future that was seen by Shikoba’s grandmother. There’s a reason
for what Apokni has told us. My wife is trying to save face for me with our
tribe. She was tryin’ to make things easier for me back with the tribe. There’s
a reason she’s said you must now marry Nita. It must be so. I realize now it is
a lie. We know, Judah. We know.”
“Kimeya, it’s a lie…”
“Yes, I know, Judah. I know. It was done for me. She meant
well but it has harmed you, harmed Nita. Now, just listen. We know. We know you
are honorable. We will do this my way. We will do this the way it is supposed
to be. I will make it right. Hush now. I must sing for you.” Kimeya said.
As the ol’ Choctaw man began to sing on that mountain top, his
hand rested on Judah’s head. He began to sing, low an’ slow. Judah an’ David
understood some of the Choctaw words but didn’t follow what Kimeya was singin’.
Teneca quietly translated for them.
Kimeya them lifted his hand from Judah’s head. He stepped a
tight circle around the young man. Judah stood quiet. He looked forward, never
movin’ as Kimeya made one circuit after another around him. He sang with each
step, each circuit around Judah.
He then paused an’ called to David an’ Teneca. He held out
his hands an’ motioned for David an’ Teneca to take them. They did. Kimeya then
placed both their hands on Judah’s chest.
“David, this is my fault. I made a decision years ago that
was wrong. I made a decision to gain place in my tribe. I made promises. I forced
arrangements for political reasons to gain status. I was, I am a foolish ol’
blind man. Today I right a wrong. Today I do what is supposed to be done. Just
now I do what I am supposed to do. Friend David, I have blessed your son. Teneca,
I have blessed your daughter. I have given my granddaughter Nita to him with my
blessin’s. I have given him the blessin’s of our clan. I have made things
right. No one will be told Nita is with child for she is not. We know that now.
It was a convenient lie. It is a lie I do not need. I bear the burden of my
choices. Judah, I have heard many songbirds call your name. I have heard them
tell of many children, many grandchildren for you an’ my granddaughter. You do
not have to believe. I believe for you.” Kimeya said with a knowin’ smile.
“Teneca, do you give your blessin’?” Kimeya asked.
Teneca smiled an’ said, “Yes.”
Then he said, “Friend David, do you give your blessin’?”
David smiled an lifted his other hand to rest on his son’s
shoulder. “He always has my blessin’. Yes, I bless this marriage. His Mama an’
I bless him. Selby has already agreed that it should be so.”
Kimeya nodded as David did his best to translate from
English to Choctaw.
“David, when we go back down the mountain, will you get your
book, your Bible that we can make our marks in? You can write in your words
that today, just now, Judah an’ Nita are married. I have made it so. Now it is
right. Now it is good. I will make my mark there.” Kimeya explained.
Judah was slack-jawed at what Kimeya said. “What? How can we
be…”
Kimeya smiled an’ patted Judah’s chest. “It is so.”
“But Nita ain’t here. She doesn’t know. How can you marry us
when she’s not here? An’ she’s not goin’ to have a baby. We haven’t…” Judah
asked.
“Who said she must be here? I could have married both of you
when Apokni, me, Teneca an’ Isa sat with your parents. All I needed to do was
say so. We know she is not with child, Judah. There is no shame. We have been
told you an’ Nita will someday have a child. That was a vision of your future.
Ol’ man Crow has laughed at me an’ told me the truth. Apokni does not need to
save face for me. I am an ol’ blind man. I do not need status in our tribe. I
am who I am meant to be. That is enough. Ol’ man Crow laughed at the joke.”
Kimeya said.
“She is your wife, my new son.” Teneca said with a wide
grin.
“But…” Judah tried to question.
David grinned. “Their ways are not ours, son. All we have to
do is write it down in our Bible. We ain’t got no preacher. An’ besides, we’re
havin’ a weddin’ ceremony for Daniel an’ Shikoba tomorrow. We’ll just make it
official for both couples.”
Kimeya followed enough of the conversation to nod an’ agree.
“Judah, there will be no shame for you an’ Nita. There will also be no shame
for Daniel an’ Shikoba. I will break the arrangements with no mention of
Shikoba bein’ with child either.”
“Now, Go find Nita. Tell her to come. Bring me your wife, my
new grandson.” Kimeya said with a sly smile.
Judah looked at Kimeya for a moment, not sure of what he was
sayin’.
Then a smile crossed Judah’s face. “She’s not goin’ to like
this. She’s hurt, embarrassed, you know.”
Kimeya smiled an’ patted Judah’s shoulder. “That doesn’t
matter now. She will forgive me, forgive Apokni. She is a good woman. It is
done. She is your wife.”
“Oh my. You just don’t know. Bless your heart, you just
don’t know Nita like I do. Wait here.” He grinned an’ ran down the mountain.
86.
Judah ran down to the cabin an’ then toward the Choctaw
camp. He began callin’ to Nita as he ran.
“Nita. Nita!” he called.
At first, he heard no answer. As he ran, he looked from side
to side along the trail. He suspected Nita might not be at the camp. He
continued to cry out.
“Nita.” He called.
About that time, Nita stepped out of the little side trail
that led to the tiny waterfall. That place that had become their hideaway was
often her place of rest an’ retreat.
“Judah, what is it? Are you well? What’s wrong?” Nita called
to him as he ran.
Judah ran up to Nita an’ stopped. He was out of breath when
he paused.
“Let me catch my breath.” He said.
Nita was puzzled. She too had been shocked, hurt by the
accusations that had been pointed at her. Her eyes were red rimmed. Tears still
lay on her cheeks.
“Judah, I don’t want…” she started.
“Nita, I’ve been on the mountain with Kimeya. You need to
come.” He said as he stepped close.
“No, Judah. I can’t. I’ve been shamed. We both have been
shamed terribly. We can no longer even stand here together. I just can’t.” she
cried.
“Nita, please, come with me. Come up the mountain with me.”
He said.
“No, Judah. I can’t. We can’t even be seen together any
longer. I’m not havin’ a baby. You know that. You know we’ve not been together.”
He stopped smilin’. He said in a quiet voice, “I know. Trust
me, my Nita. Please, come with me up the mountain.”
Nita shook her head. “No.”
About that time Apokni an’ Selby came up the pathway. Apokni
saw the pleadin’ in Judah’s eyes when he turned an’ faced her. She saw his
heart as she saw his eyes.
“Nita, little one, go with him.” Apokni said in a calm
voice. “This is my fault, granddaughter. We wish to make things right. It is
good. It is right. Go with him.”
Though she didn’t want to go, she nodded an’ obeyed.
“Grandmother, I have not shamed my family. Judah, I will not
shame my family to marry you. We have not, will not sleep together, no matter
how much I love you. I will not ask you to betray your beliefs. I will not
disobey the arrangement made for me. I will go up to speak to my grandfather
but I’ll go alone.” She said quietly.
Judah tried to take her hand but she pulled away. Apokni
tried to explain, to make things right but Nita did not care to listen. She
turned an’ walked away by herself.
87.
It was a sight to see that girl march up that mountain. She
was not happy. She was indignant. She had been shamed. Judah was shamed. She
didn’t know who started the rumor that she was goin’ to have a baby. Whoever
started that better watch out.
That gal was on fire.
When she arrived at the top of the ridge an’ saw Kimeya, her
grandfather. She knew he heard her. Her grandfather often pretended not to be
aware of those that might approach. She knew it was a trick he pulled often to cause
those who approached him to be off balance.
She weren’t fallin’ for it. She walked right up to him. He
was sittin’ with David Carpenter an’ Teneca, her father on a fallen log.
“Grandfather.” She said.
That was all. Nothing more. Just that.
Kimeya nodded. “Sit with me, Nita.”
“No. I will not. I’m fine standin’ here. Judah said you
wanted to see me. Grandmother told me I should come up here eariler. I’m here
now. I am tired of you all tellin’ me what to do. I will not obey you any
longer. Say whatever you have to say, ol’ man.” She answered.
That was absolutely the wrong answer. It might fly one day
in the distant future. It didn’t fly just then.
As David Carpenter often said when talkin’ about somethin’
that weren’t workin’, “That dog don’t hunt.”
Problem was, she decided to have her say. She then lit into
her grandfather with both feet first. She told him what she thought. She told
him she weren’t havin’ no baby. She didn’t plan on havin’ no baby any time soon.
An’ she definitely weren’t goin’ to have no baby with that ol’ man they saddled
her with back in Georgia. She was tired of ol’ people makin’ decisions for her.
She might have to marry that other man but he weren’ getting’ her “with child”
as they all was so careful to say. He better watch out when he did marry her. As
old as he was (in his mid-30’s) she might be a widow sooner rather than later. She
weren’t havin’ none of that nonsense.
(Her Daddy had to hide a snicker when she suggested she’d be
an early widow. He’d started to caution her that she was out of line as she was
givin’ Kimeya a piece of her mind. Kimeya carefully reached over an’ patted
Teneca on the arm an’ shook his head.)
“Three cows, Grandfather? Three cows? That’s all I’m worth?
Three cows? My family is tradin’ me to an ol’ man for three cows? You don’t
even kniw if they’re good cows!”
Teneca laughed out loud at that. “Be glad for that. Your
cousin Shikoba’s bride price was two cows.”
Nita was not amused.
She went on right hard for a bit longer. She finally ran out
of steam. She was just startin’ to turn an’ head back down the mountain.
“I did not tell you that you could go.” Kimeya said with a
calm voice.
Though his eyes were blind, he knew she was turnin’ to go
back down the path.
David’s eyes got real big. He heard a tone of voice from
Kimeya that he’d never heard. He understood exactly what the ol’ blind man said
to his granddaughter. The calmness in Kimeya’s voice told of a storm underneath
that was about to be unleashed.
Teneca was also surprised by his father’s words. Kimeya was
a quiet leader. He was, an’ would continue to be the patriarch of their clan.
Didn’t matter that he was blind. He was still head. He too knew the tone of
voice from Kimeya was a warnin’.
It was as if that ridge was in the center of a violent storm
that was a brewin’. Kimeya was master of that storm. Nita might just get
uprooted.
That stopped Nita in her tracks. It was a different world
back then, don’t you know. She’d stepped across a line that was never, not ever
stepped over. She was still a child in many ways. She was still one of the
youngest members of Kimeya’s clan. She had the least amount of standin’ in the
clan because of her youth.
That simple statement from Kimeya was a warnin’.
Storms a’comin’.
“Nita, you will come an’ sit beside me. David Carpenter,
Teneca, I will speak to my granddaughter alone. You may return down the path
now.” Kimeya said.
It was as if thunder roared an’ lightnin’ flashed around
that ol’ man. It was as Nita was bein’ caught up in a maelstrom caused by her
actions an’ words.
It was that same voice, that same powerful command that
cause the other to stand. Neither man paused. They knew better. Even a grown man
ain’t goin’ to get lost in that tempest.
They were up an’ headin’ down the path right then. Teneca
didn’t look back.
When the two men left Nita obediently sat beside Kimeya.
“Granddaughter, tell me why I should not have you beaten? Why
should I not cast you out of our clan? You have no standin’ before me. You are
a child. Not even your father speaks to me like that. It would be my right. You
have dishonored me in front of the men in my clan. That is never allowed. Even
worse, you have dishonored me in from of outsiders. David Carpenter is my
friend but he is not one of us. If our tribe heard you speak to me like that,
they would have you beaten. The women of the tribe would take you away to
punish you. Your family would stand an’ watch with approvin’ eyes as you were
beaten by many women in our tribe. You have done great wrong.” Kimeya said in a
quiet voice.
“Grandfather…” Nita began.
“No. You may not call me that. Not just now. I am clan head.
You have said all you will say. Now you listen. Shikoba’s grandmother had a
vision when she held your hands. She called for your grandmother to come. She
told her many things. She told Apokni she saw in her dyin’ visions that you
would have a child with Judah. Yes, there was the assumption the rest of us
made that you were already with child. Apokni was told that was not so. Shikoba’s
grandmother only told her she saw that you would have a child with Judah. Not
that it had happened. She planned how it could be with Shikoba’s grandmother.
They felt this was the way it must be. She told us you were already with child
for my benefit. It was done to allow me to save face.” He told Nita.
“We spoke with your mother an’ father, with David an’ Selby
Carpenter. Perhaps It was not wise for your grandmother to pretend that you
were already with child. She decided that lie would allow us, allow me to save
face when we returned home. If you were havin’ another man’s baby, we, I, could
save face. The blame would be laid on you alone. I would save face an’ position
in the tribe. We could pay the family of your betrothed husband a price for
breakin’ the arrangement. You would be able to marry Judah. We wanted to
fulfill the vision. It was a good thing for you to marry Judah Carpenter. Your
father an’ mother, as well as my wife were tryin’ to save my reputation. I
arranged your marriage, arranged Shikoba’s marriage years ago. I did so tryin’
to boost my place in the tribe. It was a marriage that would elevate our clan
in the tribe. For that, I am sorry, granddaughter. We said you were to have a
child with Judah because I was tryin’ to save face as we sought to fulfill the
vision…” he faltered.
88.
Nita was not sure what to say.
“But why did you say I had shamed you? Why was I accused of
bein’ with Judah? Did you not trust me?”
Kimeya shook his head. “Your grandmother told us that
falsehood because she loves me. My status in he tribe was already lessened when
I went blind. I wasn’t always blind, child. We know you both are young. We all
know how it is to be young, full of life and desires. You both have had
opportunities to be alone. I was young once, child. We all were. We know how it
is.”
“But I’m not you. Judah is not you.” She answered.
“No, no you are not. However, now you have no choice. I am
your grandfather. I am head of this clan. I am Kimeya. I have already decided. My
decision is regardless of what your grandmother did, what she said. I have made
a decision. You will obey my words.” He said.
Though he was doin’ his best to show real regret, he was
still from an older time, an older generation. The tribe’s ways still guided
his beliefs an’ decisions. In his mind, in the ways of the tribe his decision
was law.
“What do you mean?” she asked.
“Nita, the deed is done. I have already blessed your
marriage to Judah. I have already sung the blessin’s. I have heard the winds
whisper. I have heard the songbirds sing. Your father, Teneca, David Carpenter
an’ I agreed together. On this day I have already sealed you to Judah
Carpenter. There is no arranged marriage contract stronger than that vision of
you an’ Judah together. Shikoba’s grandmother has seen it. I have heard it. I
chose to set aside that arranged marriage. It is done. It is my choice, my
decision. I have already bound you to Judah.” He said with a strong voice.
Nita shook her head, “Grandfather, why? What have you done
to me now? How many cows did David Carpenter promise for me? I know you did it
for yourself. Ain’t about me or my happiness. All about you, I’m sure. I don’t
count. Never did. My feelin’s don’t count. What I want doesn’t count, does it? What
did you gain with this arrangement? What did he promise?”
She was on fire all over again.
Problem is, she weren’t listenin’. She went too far. She
made accusations. She insulted her grandfather’s integrity.
“That is enough, girl. You will stop. You have gone too far
with me. You push too hard. There were no bride gifts. There is no gain for me
or our clan. I am the one who will be shamed. Have you not listened? Does your
heart not tell you what your ears have not heard? Shame, shame is on you just
now. You know better, girl. What I have done will set you on a hard path. I
have done you no favors. I fear I have made great difficulties for you, for
your husband Judah. It will not be an easy thing, your marriage. The path I
took was because we thought you loved Judah Carpenter. Perhaps I was wrong. He
loves you, Nita. He professed his love for you to me, your father an’ to his
father. Perhaps I was wrong. You’ve shown me just how wrong I was. I do not
know you. You do not know yourself. I will undo what I have done.”
She just looked at her grandfather. He could feel her stare
even with his blind eyes.
Kimeya sighed. He shook his head. His face showed his
growin’ anger toward Nita. He was tired an’ done.
“Go on back down, girl. Go an’ be glad you have not been
beat. Be glad I havn’t cast you out. I should. You are a stranger. I don not
know you. I give up. I can’t even claim you as my granddaughter. You are not
her. She would not have spoken to me as you have. I will set your marriage to
Judah Carpenter aside. I am done with this.” He said with a hard voice.
“I will explain to Judah. I will tell Teneca I did not seal your
marriage with the marriage blessin’. I will tell David that I changed my mind.
Go on down the hillside, girl. I was wrong. I thought there was deep love,
abidin’ love in your heart. I see you have no love for that man. I thought you
loved him as much as he loves you. He cried for you, child. He is a man but he
cried for you when he told me he loved you. Perhaps your heart is hard. His is
not. I will not shame Judah with a wife who does not love him.” Kimeya said.
He took his walkin’ staff in hand an’ stood. With it he felt
his way to the highest point on the ridge. He stood facin’ away from Nita. He
was silent.
Nita sat. She was not sure what she thought. She knew Judah
weren’t one to go for signs, visions an’ such. She was different though. She’d
spent many hours with Shikoba’s grandmother. She’d heard the ol’ woman speak of
many things she knew, many things she saw in her visions an’ dreams.
A thousand things sped through Nita’s mind. Her heart ached
at the things Kimeya told her. Kimeya stood silent, listenin’ still to the
wind.
In the distance an ol’ crow’s “caw, caw” sounded like
mockin’ laughter. The crow’s cry stirred somethin’ in her heart.
“Shikoba’s grandmother saw that? She saw Judah an’ me married,
havin’ a child?” Nita asked.
“Does not matter. But yes, not just one. Several children,
many.” Kimeya said with a nod.
“I don’t know about many. Don’t exactly like the sound of
that.” Nita said with an uncomfortable chuckle.
Kimeya turned. “It does not matter. Go on, girl. Better that
I am not shamed with our tribe than to fulfill the vision of a good life with an
honorable man who loves you, though I do not know why. Better to marry that
older man, to do what you don’t really want to do just to avoid shame. Better
to do that than obey the vision seen by a dyin’ woman. Better to go back to the
tribe an’ be married to the one you were promised to. I am sure you will learn
to live with him. He will need you to care for him in his old age. You will keep
him warm when he is ancient.”
Nita sat an’ listened to the wind as it whispered through
the trees. She heard the crow laugh again. The crows callin’ finally woke her
heart.
“No, no, I am not goin’ to go against the vision. I will
not. It would bring bad things to me if I disobey the vision. I will marry
Judah as you’ve commanded.” She said.
“Little girl, you are oversteppin’ again. Do I beat you
myself?” Kimeya asked with an amused tone.
Kimeya turned away an’ grinned to himself.
“Perhaps you will even learn to love Judah Carpenter.” He
said.
She sighed. He grinned once more.
“I guess I’ll try.” She said. “I’ll try. I’ll fulfill the
vision.”
Kimeya allowed her to help him down the mountain. He smiled
a knowin’ smile the whole way down.
Though he could not see it, Nita was smilin' too.
89.
A Choctaw weddin’ is a bit different from any weddin’ the
Carpenter clan ever attended. In a traditional Choctaw weddin’, the groom would
give a pig or hog (dependin’ on the size of the crowd they expected) to the
bride’s family when he asked for her hand in marriage. That pig would become
the weddin’ feast. The bride’s family was responsible for the weddin’ feast
with different family members providin’ the other dishes.
Those dishes would include hominy, specially prepared
dumplin’s an’ shuckbread. Shuckbread was a special treat. It was a cornmeal
dough that was lightly salted, sweetened and filled with spices. The dough was
shaped into loaves and wrapped in corn shucks. The shuckbread was then boiled
to make a wonderful sweet bread that was traditional at weddin’s an’ special
events.
The Choctaw women huddled together with Selby Carpenter to
plan the weddin’. It was to be a blendin’ of both family’s traditions. They
quickly realized that they needed a pig for the weddin’ feast. That pig had to
be slaughtered, dressed an’ roasted before the weddin’ the next day.
Selby hollered for David,Teneca an’ Nashoba. With Apokni’s
help, she explained what they needed. The three men chuckled to themselves at
the women’s order. Them women didn’t realize all that would be involved. The
good news was that they actually only needed a sucklin’ pig, about 40 to 50
pounds.
Teneca an’ Nashoba were troubled. “Friend David, this is
askin’ a lot at the last minute. We impose on you by askin’ for you to give up
a pig. Perhaps we use some of the meat our families have stored in the smoke
houses instead.”
David Carpenter shook his head. “No sir. This is actually a
good thing. I have a young pit that keeps escapin’. The boys have caught it
three or four times as it roots out of the pen. That pig is just the right
size. Let’s go to the back lot an’ take care of it.”
David, Teneca an’ Nashoba quickly dispatched the pig. Since
it was small, it was no problem to prepare it for roastin’. They first gutted
the carcass, savin’ the heart, live an’ kidneys. They made a small torch to singe the hair off
the skin. They washed an’ scraped the skin right quick.
David had roasted pigs before quite a few times. His
favorite method was to use a pit he dug a few years back. It had big rocks at
the bottom of the pit that were the base for the fire an’ embers. A right smart
pile of wood was thrown in an’ lit. The fire burned down to a good heap of
embers. The pig was seasoned an’ wrapped in corn husks soaked in water More
husks was laid on the embers. The pig was laid in an’ covered with more damp
corn husks. More embers was laid on top. Finally, the whole pit was covered
with dirt an’ left alone. When the required time was up, David would dig up the
pit an’ haul out the pig, done perfectly.
David mentioned his pit to Teneca. Teneca thanked him but
declined to use it.
“Friend David, Nashoba an’ I must roast the pig together. We
must roast it on a spit. We will need to begin overnight to prepare the fire.
It will take about six hours to roast the pig. Once done, it will need to rest
so’s the women can prepare the meat. We will be up all night to celebrate the
weddin’ of our daughters.” Teneca explained.
Nashoba said, “It is our custom. We must do this, Teneca an’
me.”
David understood an’ weren’ too hurt at that plan. He
weren’t fond of stayin’ up all night to roast a pig.
It was understood that Kimeya, as head of the clan would be
the “Anumpa Is-ti-ka”, That is sort of the master
of ceremonies for a Choctaw weddin’. David would join Kimeya to do his portion
of the marriage ceremony. The two men huddled together in the Carpenter cabin
to plan the ceremony that would honor both family’s traditions.
The traditional ceremonies had to be altered due to the
blendin’ of the two cultures. Kimeya an’ David often laughed as they planned.
After the bumpy start they had with Judah an’ Nita, they were happy with their
joint ceremony.
90.
Teneca an’ Nashoba dug a deep firepit to the side of the
Choctaw camp. They circled the pit with stones. The pit was lined with more
stones. Once the pit was ready, they started burnin’ well-seasoned hickory, oak
an’ Chestnut. In order to get a good, deep bed of embers they needed to build a
healthy fire.
For hours they went back an’ forth from the firepit to a
makeshift table. The pig carcass was thoroughly cleaned. With their knives they
poked deep holes all over the carcass. Teneca cut several large onions into long
sections. Nashoba was cleanin’ hot peppers at the same time. Those slices of
onion an’ hot pepper was pushed into the deep holes in the pig carcass.
Teneca poured salt along with several dried herbs an’ spices
into a large wooden bowl, blendein’ the contents well. When he was satisfied
with the blend, he poured in molasses an’ honey he acquired from Nita. He
blended the molasses an’ honey into the salt an’ spice mix with a wooden spoon.
They would slater the mixture onto the pig now an’ again as it roasted.
Eventually the mixture would form a wonderful caramelized coatin’ on the skin.
By evenin’ the embers in the firepit were deep an’ ready. A
spit was prepared an’ waitin’. Two long skewers was pushed into the pig carcass
to keep the meat in place as the skewers were turned.
David Carpenter walked down to check on the men an’ their
preparations. They explained their preparations. David was definitely impressed
with their combination of ingredients.
“That sounds right tasty. Never went to that much trouble
when I pit roasted a pig. Can’t wait. When will you put the spit over the
fire?” he asked.
Nashoba answered, “We’ll put the pig on now. It needs
between five an’ six hours to get the meat done. We’ll turn the spit
occasionally so as to allow all sides to roast well. Teneca an’ I will take
turns sleepin’. One sleeps an’ one watches the pig. The pig will be done by
early mornin’. The women need time for the meat to cool enough to be handled.
They will take apart an’ prepare the meats.”
Teneca added, “Talli is preparin’ sauces an’ dips for the
meat. It will be good. You will be pleased.”
David spent the evenin’ with Judah an’ Daniel over to the
barn so as not to wake other folks. They talked long into the night. They was
farm grown. They’d been around livestock an’ knew the basics of how things
happened. Daniel had the obvious experience of already bein’ with Shikoba. He
grinned now an’ again as his father tried to give them “manly advice”.
“I don’t know how to give you two boys life advice. You know
about as much as I do about life. You know how to live safe in these mountains.
Here’s the one thing you don’t know yet. Life out here is hard. We could all be
gone next year. Too many things could snuff our lives, our future plans out
like a candle. Us men need to be ready to defend our homes, our families. Boys,
you need to stand in the gap between the world an’ your family every day. You
need to keep them safe. We have to be ready to fight for what we believe, boys.
When the time comes, I’ll do exactly that. The day will come.” David said.
“Tomorrow your lives change. Sure, y’all will always be my
boys. You’re still so young. Tomorrow you’ll l have a wife. You need to take
care of her. She’s your everythin’. One day, one day soon you’ll have
youngin’s. They’ll be your life. Them an’ your wives will be your priority.
They have to come first. They have to come before your own life, boys. That’s
our job. We stand between them an’ everythin’.”
Judah an’ Daniel had talks with their father many times
before. As they hunted, as they sat on a river bank fishin’, as they herded the
livestock they talked. Not like this though. They was serious as they listened.
They didn’t say anything. They realized life just changed. Just then as their
Daddy talked, they understood that something was different. It would always be
different.
Judah spoke first. “We’ll make you proud, Pap. We promise.
We’ll always make you proud.”
91.
A traditional Choctaw weddin’ was a mite different from the
weddin’ that was to occur at the Carpenter homestead. For the traditional
ceremony the women would prepare the food. It was then divided into various
baskets or buckets prepared specially for each person. The baskets would be set
aside an’ ready for the feast that was part of the marriage ceremony.
Because of the abbreviated plannin’ time that tradition was
not possible. The women, includin’ Selby Carpenter, got together an’ decided to
have the weddin’ feast down by the firepit where they still gathered for meals.
While the men folks had been away on that exgtended huntin’
trip, the women set up a long temporary table made from David Carpenter’s saw
horses an’ boards stored in the barn. When the men arrived back the two clans
continued to gather together on Sundays for a meal. (Of course, they all knew
that practice would have to be abandoned as the weather turned colder.
The long makeshift table was set up. A pile of firewood was
laid beside the firepit so’s they could keep it burnin’ durin’ the weddin’ day.
The youngin’s gathered dried wildflowers, pine boughs an’ pinecones. They
decorated the table in preparation for the feast.
In a Choctaw weddin’ the groom’s family waits a good
distance away from the place the ceremony would happen. Several women from the
bride’s family would escort the bride to her place. The “Anumpa Is-ti-ka”,
master of ceremonies would stand an’ wait with the bride. The groom’s family
would then escort the groom to the spot where his bride waited.
Kimeya an’ David decided they would stand side by side to
perform the ceremony. They’d take turn about, each doin’ portions of the
ceremony they planned. Since David was to conduct the ceremony with Kimeya he
was unable to escort Daniel an’ Judah up the path to where their two brides waited.
When the time came both clans were in place. David an’
Kimeya came out of the Carpenter cabin an’ stood. Kimeya turned his head to his
right an’ called out to Teneca an’ Nashoba.
“Come.” He cried out.
David an’ Selby had been workin’ with Shikoba an’ Nita’s
family to prepare the two cabins that sat in the back of the Carpenter
homestead for the two soon to be newlywed couples. Each of the two couples
would reside in one of the cabins. They would spend their weddin’ night in the
cabins.
It had been a hurried set up, but they all felt the cabins
was ready for the two couples to take up housekeepin’. Selby was a quilter as
her Mama had been. She had a trunk full of quilts made by her, her mama as well
as various grandmas an’ aunts. Each cabin had clean sheets on a corn husk
mattress. Quits was carefully laid on each of the two beds in the cabins.
Though the cookware was a mite lean, the two couples would
have the basics as they took up housekeepin’. Both clans gathered items from
their stores to provide the young couples with basic needs. Kimeya even made a
broom for each cabin right quick. He had his young grandkids as well as Selby’s
twins gather enough broom sedge for the brooms. Ahanu helped his grandfather as
they sat together the evenin’ before the weddin’.
Teneca an’ Nashoba went to the door of each cabin to gather
their daughters. Shikoba an’ Nita waited inside the cabins with their mamas.
When their daddy called their names, they stepped out. Both brides was dressed
in their finest. Each girl had sewn a beautiful deer suede dress that had been
bleached white. They beaded the dresses with beautiful patterns. Young Choctaw
girl made similar dressess for their weddin’s years before they actually were
married.
Both brides had their hair braided an’ wrapped into a bun on
their heads. Shikoba had a crown of pine wrapped around an’ tucked into her
hair. Holly encircled Nita’s head. It was carefully placed so as not to stick
her with the sharp tips on each leaf.
Each wore a pair of beaded moccasins they’d sewn an’ beaded
as part of their weddin’ garb.
Their parents then stepped to either side of the girls an’
led them to stand in front of Kimeya an’ David.
Abraham an’ Jacob, the twins was standin’ in wait beside the
dinner bell that was on the side of the big cabin. When the brides was in place
David nodded to the twins. Them boys took hold of the rope an’ rang that bell
to beat the band. They was only supposed to ring the bell one time. They
figured they’d do their brothers right by lettin’ that bell ring out loud an’
clear on that weddin’ day.
When the Carpenter clan heard the bell, they stepped into
place an’ marched up the path toward the waitin’ brides. Since Judah was
oldest, he was on the right of his mama. Daniel was on the left. Selby
Carpenter had her arms wrapped into the crook of her two son’s elbows.
When the family came close Judah an’ Daniel grinned. Shikoba
an’ Nita were not supposed to turn to look. Shikoba did start to turn. Apokni
spoke sharply, in a whisper, of course. She told Shikoba to turn around.
Once they was at the front, Judah an’ Daniel stepped to the
side of their brides.
92.
Though he couldn’t see them, Kimeya heard enough movement to
know both grooms was in place. He cleared his throat an’ began to sing.
Everyone was real quiet like as Kimeya sang.
Daniel an’ Shikoba both was grinnin’ like ol’ possums. Judah
an’ Nita had big smiles on their lips but both were blushin’.
Truth be told, them two never imagined that they’d be
gettin’ married that day or any day. It was excitin’ for them. They both
realized they would be spendin’ that night an’ all their nights to come with the
one they loved.
That there was a lot to take in for them two young folks.
Kimeya stopped singin’ an’ turned his head to David. He
nodded an’ spoke in a low tone to David.
“It is good, my friend. Is very good.” He said.
David smiled an’ whispered, “Yes, I believe it is. We’ve
done good, Kimeya.”
Kimeya nodded an’ grinned right big.
David began his part of the ceremony. He reminded the two
couples that the weddin’ that day was not only their joinin’ together. It was
also two families, two clans, two cultures joinin’. He reminded them that Jesus
first miracle was done at a weddin’. He reminded them that marriage is a sacred
contract in any culture. Not just a promise, but a contract, a covenant between
husband an’ wife.
He asked the two couples to exchange vows he wrote from his
memory of weddin’s past. He didn’t know exactly what he’d promise when he
married Selby but he made due. He got the vows close enough. All four of them
youngin’s was grinnin’ big as they repeated the promises in English an’
Choctaw.
Though it wasn’t customary for Choctaw folks to wear weddin’
rings, David an’ Teneca had a surprise. Selby had two long silver spoons (what
might look like a long handle iced tea spoon) in what had been her hope chest. The
night before the weddin’ Selby asked David if there was any way to make a ring
for each girl. He looked the spoons over an’ disappeared back to his small
blacksmith shop at the back of the barn. Teneca was stayin’ up much of the
night with Nashoba to roast the pig, When they heard what David was up to, Nashoba
told him to help David. David an’ Teneca
measured, plotted an’ planned as they crafted the rings. They heated up the
little foundry an’ worked together for hours.
When the couples finished their vows, David nodded to Teneca
an’ Nashoba who joined him in front of the brides an’ grooms. The three gave a
ring to each of the couples. Those three Daddys was grinnin’ ear to ear. They’d
cut the fancy end off of the two spoons, heated the silver up an’ stretched it
a bit as David shaped it around a wood peg. The top end of the two spoons had a
lovely flower shape. The other end was smoothed over an tucked under the
flowered pattern so as not to cut into the ring finger. David figured he could
adjust the size once the weddin’ was over.
The middle part of the handle was then rolled around a peg.
They made plain silver rings for the two grooms. Those rings also had ends that
was smoothed out an’ carefully joined but not fused.
Nita an’ Shikoba were given the plain rings. Judah an’
Daniel had the fancy rings. Davis instructed them to place the rings on each
other’s fingers. Both Nita an’ Shikoba cried.
Once the rings were on the appropriate fingers the four
stood an’ looked at the rings for ever so long.
Then David turned to Kimeya. He touched Kimeya’s arm. Kimeya
nodded an’ smiled.
David said, “It is done. Now we sign.”
He helped Kimeya over to a small table that had been set up
on the right side of the porch. Teneca an’ Nashoba followed. The Carpenter
family Bible was layin’ open to the marriage records page. Since Selby’s
handwritin’ was better than David’s, she’d already written the information
down. David also had two pieces of paper layin’ on the table with the details
of the marriages written down.
David helped Kimeya find the place to make his mark, first
in the family Bible then on the marriage certificates. Kimeya did so with a
great flourish. Nashoba an’ Teneca followed. David signed his name an’ them
wrote the names of the others above their marks.
Though Kimeya saw no reason for Apokni, Talli or Isa to sign
the documents, Aopkni was insistent that she an’ the three mothers sign also.
Once the men finished, Apokni led the way with Selby by her side.
Selby pointed to where marks were to be made. Apokni
surprised her an’ everyone else by carefully writin’ “A P K N E” in large,
careful letters. She turned, handed the quill to Selby with a huge grin. Selby
handed it to Talli an’ then Isa. They made their marks. Selby signed her name
an’ then wrote Isa an’ Talli’s names over their marks.
Apokni weren’t lettin’ the men get the last word. She
stepped down off the porch an’ went to the couples. She took all four into her
arms an’ gave them a big ol’ bear hug. She kissed the foreheads of each of the
brides an’ then the grooms.
Finally, she said, “It is so. Now we eat.”
Everyone began to make their way toward the long table. The
women scattered to bring dishes, pots an’ bowls of food back to the table.
Judah, Nita, Daniel an’ Shikoba just stood there. They
didn’t know exactly what to do. David noticed an’ stepped off the porch an’
toward them.
“I think this is where you kiss your brides, boys.” He said
with a laugh.
Them boys did kiss their brides. The brides kissed them
right back.
93.
The two clans were now forever joined together with a
ceremony, a contract, a promise that was as old as history itself. Modern
weddin’s have the bride an’ groom front an’ center. That weddin' turned into a
flurry of activity with the newlyweds almost forgotten.
After the ceremony, the
two families quickly merged together as they went from where the weddin’ took
place to gatherin’ around the long makeshift table.
The women of the family didn’t waste no time. They was
gatherin’ food from one place an’ another. Both families had both metal an’ hand-made,
well-worn wooden platters that were heaped with food. A long platter was filled
with the disassembled roast pig.
The head had been set aside just after the pig was
butchered. It was easier to roast a pig with the head removed. Selby claimed
trotters (hocks an’ feet), the heart as well as the head. She was already in
the process of makin’ souse. Her souse would be snacked on an’ enjoyed by
everyone a couple days after the weddin’.
Large bowls was filled with the special dumplin’s, frybread an’
other special dishes prepared just for the feast. Selby placed a large
hand-woven basket of cornbread on the table. David had insisted on cornbread to
go along with the pork meat.
David asked everyone to pause while he said a blessin’ over
the food. Once the blessin’ was finished, Selby took over. She told all the
youngin’s that the newlyweds fill their plates first. Then the older folks load
up their plates. The youngin’s in both families knew that custom demanded that
youngin’s wait till last to fill their plates. That’s just how they all honor
their elders.
Them elders didn’t eat all that much anyways.
The time the two clans spent together over the past weeks
caused all the adults to immerse themselves in each other’s language. Even over
the meal the language lessons continued. Someone would point to a food item an’
the appropriate name of the dish would be shared in both English an’ Choctaw.
Even Kimeya jumped in an’ practiced the various English words for the different
dishes.
The fire in the firepit burned bright as they ate. It would
burn long into the night. No one wanted the evenin’ to end. Weren’t too many
times in them days that folks set everyday chores aside an’ had such a feast
an’ merriment.
Yep, there was chores to be done. The youngin’s from both
families stepped away to take care of livestock, keep the home fires burnin’
an’ trim candles or lanterns.
Both men an’ women sat together as they ate an’ a long time afterwards.
Eventually stories began to be shared. They took a bit longer because the
stories had to be told in both languages. It was fun to watch the tellers pause
along the way to allow translations.
No one noticed when Daniel an’ Shikoba snuck away to their
new home. The two cabins where the new couples would take up housekeepin’ was a
little over fifty yards behind the big cabin. Those cabins was spaced about
fifty yards apart.
Their parents made sure that the cabin was warm an’
invitin’. A fire was merrily burnin’ in the hearth when they went in. Daniel
grinned as he turned to shut the door. He looked out toward the folks still
gathered by the long table. He knew their parents intended to show up sometime
durin’ the night for a shivaree. All those gathered would end up around the
cabin to loudly serenade the newlywed couple.
He reminded Shikoba that they’d hear it soon enough.
Though they’d already been together, Shikoba was nervous.
Her cheeks was red an’ flushed. Sneakin’ around to be together was one thing.
Spendin’ their weddin’ night together with family so close was an’ entirely
different situation.
She was glad the families was distracted.
There was several candles burnin’ in the cabin when they
arrived. Daniel smiled an’ blew out the candles. There’d be enough light from
the fireplace. No need to waste candles that evenin’. He stepped close to his
bride. Daniel took her into his arms an’ they kissed.
“You are loved, Shikoba. Forever you are loved.” He
whispered.
“You are loved, my husband.” She answered.
94.
Livin’ in the wilds of Tennessee prior to the American
Revolution was tough livin’. Seein’ them folks celebratin’ two marriages at the
Carpenter homestead could make folks think that life was all wonderful an’
amazin’. Fact is, both the clans gathered together that day worked hard to
survive each day.
Havin’ an opportunity to celebrate, especially celebratin’
the marriage of your youngin’s was a chance to let your hair down. Though
younger folks might not see much hair lettin’ down, them folks gathered round
the remnants of the weddin’ feast was havin’ a fine time.
They didn’t notice when Daniel an’ Shikoba snuck off. Didn’t
see Judah an’ Nita sittin’ on the porch of the Carpenter cabin with Ahanu. He
snuck away from the table earlier. The backless bench he’d been sittin’ on
didn’t give him much comfort.
Though he was healin’ up right well, he still had plenty of
healin’ to go before he was done.
Judah sat beside Ahanu. Nita was on the other side of Ahanu.
They sat mostly quiet. Now an’ again they’d laugh as they watched the old
folks. Those around the table had commenced to tellin’ stories, singin’ songs.
They laughed as both families tried their best to translate
stories an’ songs from one language to the other.
After they sat for a while, Ahanu commenced to grinnin’. “I have
a surprise for y’all.”
Judah asked, “A surprise? What do you mean?”
“I visited with Shikoba’s grandmother several times lately.
She called for me each time. She told me a lot, asked me a lot. She also gave
me instructions for you, both of you.” He answered.
“What sort of instructions?” Nita asked. She was a little
wary about that ol’ seer’s instructions concernin’ her.
“You do know that later on them ol’ folks plan on doin’ a
shivaree on y’all as well as Daniel an’ Shikoba, right? He asked.
Judah nodded, “We figured as much.”
“She said that weren’t supposed to happen for y’all. She spoke
of Judah’s love the high places.” Ahanu told them.
Judah nodded, “Well sure. So?”
Ahanu stood. “Come with me right quick. Come on, before
anyone notices.”
He led them to the barn. Inside he brushed straw from two
packs. “These are for y’all. Judah, she knew you had that huntin’ shack you
built up yonder on the mountain. She said you love the high places. Said you
two are to spend this night there. Several nights there. Said it would be
important for your future. Said it would be lodged in your memory. Said it was
important.”
Nita was puzzled. “I’ve seen the huntin’ shack. It’s more
like a little cabin. We’ve been there, me an’ Judah. Why there? Why tonight?”
Ahanu shrugged. “Don’t know. She said you both would
understand someday. Said it was important for y’all to go up there on your
weddin’ night. Besides, y’all don’t need no shivaree tonight.”
Nita blushed in the twilight. Judah grinned.
“Well, I wouldn’t mind missin’ that. What do you think,
Nita?” Judah asked.
Nita grabbed the pack Ahanu held out for her. “Catch me if
you can, husband.”
Judah laughed an’ grabbed the other pack. He slung it on his
back an’ ran after his wife.
Ahanu stood there grinnin’ for a long time. Eventually, he
wandered back to the porch of the Carpenter cabin. When asked he told the other
folks he had no idea where Judah an’ Nita was. Said they told him they’d see
everyone in a couple days.
95.
It took about twenty minutes for Nita an’ Judah to get up to
Judah’s little huntin’ shack. Normally the trek would be a bit shorter. This
time Judah an’ Nita played a frisky game of hide an’ seek along with her
original “catch me if you can”.
When Judah built the shack, it was little more than what
might be called an’ “Adirondack shelter”. Judah started it when he was about
thirteen years old. His younger brother Daniel helped now an’ again till it was
completed. Both boys used it as a getaway when there were no chores an’ when
their Daddy allowed them to wander off into the mountain.
It was a right good size for a huntin’ shack when they
completed it. They used their daddy’s saw an’ ax to cut decent sized logs.
Those logs made up the three original sides of the shelter. In the front an’ to
one side of the shelter, they built a fire pit. Though similar shelters had a
sleepin’ bench across the back, Daniel insisted on havin’ sleepin’ benches on
either side of the shelter. Didn’t seem like no big deal. That is till they
slept up there durin’ a hard rain.
Both boys realized the open front didn’t provide shelter for
the front end of their sleepin’ benches. In good weather it worked fine. Worked
alright in cool weather. Just was miserable when it rained or snowed.
That’s when Judah decided to enclose the front. They planned
for a door on one side of the enclosed front. Shorter logs was tied into the
sides with a little effort. It would have been better to build the front when
they built the sides, but they made do.
With a little planning, rocks hauled from all over the
mountain an’ some good clay they was able to turn the fire pit into a decent
fireplace right in the middle of the cabin. That kept the entire shack warm
Tacoda an’ Ahanu often used the huntin’ shack when they was
in the area. Though it could be a little tight, it provided a good spot for all
four of the young men to get away from family for a short while. It was also
right good huntin’ for whitetail deer, the occasional elk, squirrel, coon an’
other small game. Down at the far side of the mountain there was fine huntin’
for rabbit as well as game birds like grouse, doves an’ quail.
When Judah an’ Nita walked close to the huntin’ shack, Judah
stopped Nita with a hand on her arm.
“Shhh, Nita. Stop here.” He said in a whisper.
Nita stopped. “What is it? What’s wrong?”
Judah put his finger to his lips. “Someone’s been in the
shack. May still be there.”
“What?” Nita was alarmed.
He pulled her to the side of the rough trail. He pointed to
the shack that could be seen through the trees.
“Look. Smoke comin’ from the chimney. Someone’s laid a fire
in the fireplace. An’ look, Nita, there’s firewood stacked outside the door. I only
had a few pieces laid by inside an’ a small shack of firewood outside the door.
That stack in new. Way more than I had there. Daniel’s not been here since I
was here. Someone’s there.Strangers that ain’ supposed to be up here.” He
whispered.
“What do we do? Should we go back down the mountain?” she
asked.
Nita was a little scared at that point. Their walk up the
mountain had been such a lovely time together. There shouldn’t be anyone within
miles of the Carpenter homestead. If there was someone in there, so close to
the homestead, they might be up to no good. The huntin’ shack was a ways up the
mountain. Anyone stayin’ in the huntin’ shack would be able to hear the day to
day goin’s on down the hillside. They would know folks lived down below.
Judah took the pack off his shoulders. He was glad that
Ahanu had the foresight to include Judah’s bow with the pack. Judah didn’t have
a rifle of his own. Him an’ Daniel had become proficient bow hunters with the
help of Tacoda an’ Ahanu over the past several years.
“Nita, you stay here. Keep down low. Stay hidden. I’m goin’
up yonder to see who is there. I’ll have my bow drawn. I’ll sneak up on the
shack. I’m goin’ to go over here on the right side of the path an’ sneak in
along the back wall. I’ll be real quiet like. I can stand an’ listen from
there. I’ll be able to hear what’s goin’ on inside. May be someone’s there who
don’t realize this is our land. May be nothin’.”
Nita shook her head. “Judah, let’s go back down an’ get the
others. Come back up here with a bunch of the men. I’m afraid for you to go
over there. I ain’t wantin’ nothin’ to happen to you.”
“Nita, if there’s someone there, they’ve heard us. We
weren’t bein’ too stealthy. If anything happens, you get back down the hill.
Get your daddy an’ mine. Get Nashoba too. Tell them to bring their guns.” He
said as he pulled her close.
“Be careful, my husband.” She whispered.
“Hide, Nita. Hide right good. Hide like you used to hide
when I was tryin’ to catch you.” He told her with his mouth close to her ear.
96.
Judah quietly slipped away from where Nita hid. He made a
large loop away from the trail an’ back toward the huntin’ shack. After growin’
up in the mountains an’ huntin’ with his daddy an’ them Choctaw men, he was
able to move quietly in the woods.
He’d been trained by his Choctaw brothers to have one arrow
nocked an’ one held by the shaft between his teeth. His quiver hung on his back
in the event he needed a third arrow. In the event he was even able to let a
third arrow fly.
Judah’s senses was on high alert. He’d never encountered
anythin’ like this before. They all were taught be careful in the mountains.
Even around the homestead they kept their eyes an’ ears open. Strangers were
always a possible threat.
It was unusual, almost impossible for someone to have
trekked across the rough mountains to that spot. The hike from any type of
civilization to that place would take some serious skills. For someone to come
that way was of great concern. There was no reason to travel through the wilds
when there were common, well traveled paths to take.
That was what concerned Judah the most. Who would do that?
What motives did they have to not only come across several mountains an’
through rough forest to get to that point unseen?
A few years back an odd couple wandered into the Carpenter
homestead. Judah remembered it well. His daddy, David Carpenter weren’t home at
the time. He was away to the nearest settlement to do some tradin’ an’ to buy
supplies.
That there couple came wanderin’ in along the path that led
to his home. Selby heard them comin’ along the trail. They was still a ways off
when she heard the man singin’ right loud. She immediately told Judah an’
Daniel to take the other youngin’s to the barn.
“Get the little ones up into the hay loft, boys. Judah, take
your Daddy’s old black powder rifle. Get up there, load it with buckshot just
in case. Push the loft door up there open just a mite so’s you can see, I’ll
keep the baby here with me. Keep your eyes open for trouble. Daniel. You take
your bow an’ Judah’s bow. You stay off to one side down in the lower part of
the barn. Be ready to shoot iff’n you need to. I can’t tell you boys what to
do. You’ll know if you need to shoot, honey.” She told them as she shoo’ed them
off.
Turns out it was just a older feller an’ his woman. It was
easy to tell that feller’s corn weren’t popped. He weren’t workin’ with a full
deck of cards, if ya’ll know what that means. He was quotin’ the Bible,
misquotin’ it, to be frank. Was singin’ hymns an’ then startin’ up with bawdy
drinkin’ songs, goin’ from one to the other. Said “howdy” to Selby. Then he
said he was lookin’ for a place to covey up an’ hide. Said the “terrible day of
the Lord” was comin’ in a few days. Now that him an’ his woman had arrived, he
was hopin’ they might covey up with Selby an’ family to await that day.
Selby realized the feller could be trouble. She also quickly
understood the woman was backward at best. The man was just a nut case. His
dough weren’t baked.
A little quick thinkin’ on her part saved the day. She told
him he better move on. Said their preacher warned the family about that there
“worm that dies not” from the Bible. Selby told him that undyin’ worm was known
to creep around just up the mountain behind the homestead.
“I seen it just t’other day, matter of fact. It done took
off with two pigs an’ a donkey. Whoo, mercy. It is right scary. I’d sure move
on iff’n I could. You’d best do so while you can. Don’t want it fixatin’ on
you. No siree.” She said as serious like as she could.
That feller got a wild look in his eyes. Said he weren’t
ready to face off agin that there worm that dies not nor the “fire that was not
quenched”.
Selby nodded. “I completely forgot about that fire. I heard
that worm burps up that fire when it gets riled up.”
He grabbed hold of his woman, turned around an’ went back
the way they came, blubberin’ an’ whisperin’ to the woman about how he was
savin’ her once again. They was gone as quick as you can imagine.
When he returned home two days later, David Carpenter had a
good laugh as Selby told him about how she scared off that couple.
97.
Judah’s path made a large loop toward the back of the small
huntin’ shack. The shack depended on a game trail as the path to the door. The
fireplace was burnin’ bright an’ peepin’ through the cracks in the walls. They’d
already smelled an seen the smoke comin’ from the chimney. That’s what alerted
them in the first place.
Judah’s plan was to slowly make his way to the back of the
shack. He would stand close to the back wall an’ listen. His expectation was to
hear conversation if there were several occupants. He at least expected to hear
movement as the person or person inside moved about.
He took careful steps. Though he was creepin’ along in the
first beginnin’s of twilight, he still could see the forest floor clearly. He
learned from Tacoda an’ Ahanu to lift each foot an’ carefully slide the toe of
his shoe into an’ under the dry fallen leaves. Steppin’ on the leaves or hidden
twigs made significant noises as one tried to be stealthy.
Nita had moved to a more secure spot in the trees an’ brush.
She did her best to keep her eyes on Judah. However, once he was just a few
yards into the trees he faded from her view. He knew exactly where she was. She
was safe. She’d depend on him comin’ back to her spot to let her know the
situation. She trembled as she knelt an’ waited. This could be a terrible
situation for her an’ Judah. A terrible situation for all below.
Now an’ again she heard little sounds in the twilight. It
was still a right smart while to full darkness. There would be a big moon that
night. Not full, but enough to see as one would move about. Every sound caused
her to start. She thought she was bein’ silly. She cold hide in them woods
better than anyone. She’d played in them woods hundreds of times. Judah chased
her around that mountain many times as she taunted him to catch her if he
could.
“Well,” she chuckled to herself, “He finally did catch me.”
She didn’t mind a bit this time.
After about five cautious minutes, Judah stepped close to
the back of the little huntin’ shack. He stood real quiet like an’ listened.
Now an’ again he heard the pop an’ crackle of wood in the fireplace.
Nothin’ more. He took a step closer, then another till he
was able to lay his head against the logs that formed the back wall. Clay an’
moss was wedged between the logs as chinkin’. Because him an’ Daniel built the
shack when they was younger, them logs weren’t huge. They couldn’t handle big
logs as they built the shack.
Nothin’. Not a sound from inside.
That concerned Judah more than a little. They hadn’t been
careful as they came up the trail. What if them who was within the huntin’
shack heard him an’ Nita? What if they came out an’ was in search of him an’
his new wife?
That alarmed him. He decided to take the bold step of goin’
around the shack an’ goin’ in. He would be able to get an idea of who might
either be inside or had been inside.
He quietly stepped around to the front. He had a surprise
when he saw that whoever was stayin’ in the shack had been there long enough to
actually gather an’ cut a right smart pile of firewood. There was a big stack
of cut firewood right to the left side of the chimney.
The door was ajar just a mite. Whoever had been there hadn’t
shut the door completely. That alarmed him even more. He had no choice. He had
to go in.
However, he was torn. Should he go back to protect Nita or
go inside an’ confront whoever was squattin’ in his huntin’ shack? Did they
have a gun? Was they out in the twilight, stalkin’ him like he was stalkin’
them? He might be able to tell if they had a gun if there was a powder horn an’
possibles bag inside. They most likely wouldn’t be sneakin’ around with all
that gear if they was tryin’ to sneak up on Nita.
He took a step toward the door. His Daddy’s conversation
from the night before was replayin’ over an’ over again in his mind. He had
been charged to take care of the woman he loved.
He hoped he was doin’ the right thing as he flung open the
door.
98.
The shack was empty.
Seein’ the state of the huntin’ shack’s interior cause Judah
even more concern.
Whoever had been there made themselves at home. They’d moved
things around. Little things was out of place. There was a rough mantle above
the little fireplace that sat in the center of the shack. Him an’ Daniel always
kept a tin filled with char cloth as well as a flint an’ steel right smack dab
in the middle of that mantle. The tin had been moved to one end of the mantle.
Whoever had been there apparently even dumped out the tickin’ that was on the bed
platform on the left side an’ refilled it with pine boughs.
They was certainly makin’ themselves at home. One of the
beeswax candles they kept in a wooden box was stuck in the rough wood candle
holder Daniel made from a knot in a Chestnut tree. They never left them candles
out. Candles was too precious to leave out for mice to chew up an’ eat.
When him an’ Daniel didn’t have time to come up an’ check on
the place there would often be leaf litter an’ occasionally mouse droppin’s
here an’ yonder. He was infuriated. Them intruders had even taken the time to
clean up an’ sweep the shack.
They was makin’ themselves right at home.
This was more than uncomfortable. It was scary. Whoever moved
in weren’t inside the shack. That meant they was out there in the trees.
They was out there. Out where he left his Nita by herself.
Just as Judah was turnin’ to exit, to run an’ find Nita he
paused. At the very back of the huntin’ shack was a rough sawn table an’ two
stools Daniel made. Sittin’ on the table was two wooden plates laid out in
front of the stools. Wood plates him an’ Daniel used when they was there
huntin’. The tin cups they used was sittin’ right beside the plates.
What infuriated him more was two wood handled three tine
metal forks he didn’t recognize. Him an’ Daniel always brought their own forks,
as well as wooden spoons when they came to the shack. Someone, some invader,
some stranger was bold enough to set up the place as their very own.
Just as he turned to leave, he noticed a small scrap of
paper stuck under the tin cup on the right. Though he was worried about his new
wife, he paused long enough to pick the scrap up.
He noticed it had writin’ on it.
As he quickly read the note, he breathed a sigh of great
relief.
He was surprised an’ humbled as he read the note.
It said, “J and N – Ahanu, Kimeya told us sneak up, get things
ready for u. Kimeya wanted u to spend few days here. We came during feast,
started fire. Mama an’ Apokni sent food – in larder box under bed. plenty wood.
Carried bucket of water up. Covered it. Is under other bed. The forks was ours,
yours now. Weddin’ present for u.”
“Happy wedding. Abraham, Jacob.”
Judah grinned from ear to ear. Them boys. Them twins. They
could be silly. Could be a handful for their mama, but they was good boys. He
was proud they was his brothers.
He laid the note back on the table an’ went out to bring his
bride to their honeymoon suite.
99.
Judah left his bow an’ the quiver full of arrows in the
little huntin’ shack. As he walked back down toward the spot where Nita hid, he
was glad he hadn’t needed his weapon. What a surprise. What a blessin’. What a
gift from his brothers.
He wouldn’t know for a number of years the fullness of the
blessing of the twins as well as Daniel.
He was especially humbled by their gift of their forks.
Those simple utensils were the only metal ones them boys had. Sure, there was
wooden forks down at the cabin. They both had enough skills with blade an’ wood
to carve out all the forks an’ spoons they’d ever need.
Precious gifts indeed. Given not from their surplus but from
their hearts.
Them twins.
He was grinnin’ right big as he strolled down the deer
trail. He couldn’t wait to tell Nita what he found.
So as not to alarm Nita, he began to whistle a happy tune.
That would reassure her as he got closer to her hidin’ place. She knew Judah
an’ knew he loved to whistle as he walked, as he worked. He was always
whistlin’, hummin’ or singin’ a tune.
She often told him the fullness of his heart overflowed
through his whistlin’, his hummin, his singin’ little tunes.
That was one of the things Nita loved about Judah. Ever
since she first met him, he was just happy all the time. Sure, he had a rough
day now an’ then. He never let things get in the way of his happy.
As he remembered her talkin’ about his whistlin’ an’ so on,
he grinned. She never talked about his “happiness”. She always talked about his
“happy”.
She were a bit more serious than Judah. Not dour, grim or
gruff. Just a bit more serious. Neither of them had particularly easy lives.
Neither had troublesome lives. Nita’s disposition had just been a bit more serious. Had been, that
is. He always was encouragin’ her to smile, laugh, be happy. Not that she
weren’t. Most folks didn’t have the disposition Judah had. He was like
happiness all rolled up into a wad an’ thrown down on earth by the Good Lord
Above.
He changed her just by their association. It was hard not to
have Judah’s “happy” rub off when folks was around him.
“Happy”
That was her description of her new husband. Judah liked
that description. He bragged that Nita said he was just a big ol’ wad of happy.
She’d just laugh when he described himself that way.
She heard him as he whistled his way to her. She realized
all was well as soon as she heard his whistle. She stood an’ stepped away from
her hidin’ place before he was near.
“What was it, Judah? Is it OK?” she asked.
Judah was grinnin’ as he approached. Though the twilight was
fadin’, she could see that grin on his face once he stepped close.
“Nita, it was them ornery twins. Your Grandpa Kimeya an’
Ahanu sent them up here to get things ready for us. Seems like Kimeya planned
on us sneakin’ up here tonight.” Judah answered.
Nita pondered that for a moment. “Reckon there’s a reason
for it? He usually is a step ahead of everyone. He don’t do much without
reasons. ‘Course, he knows I love the high places. I was right happy when Ahanu
gave us our packs an’ sent us up here. I’d love to always live in the high
places. Grandfather knows that. I don’t know, maybe he had another vision.
Knowin’ him, there’s bound to be a reason.”
Judah picked up Nita’s pack in one hand an’ took her hand
with the other. “Yep, he always is a couple steps ahead of me. Probably a
couple steps ahead of everyone. I don’t know about the visions an’ such. I
ain’t never heard no messages from the wind, wildlife or critters. He says he
does. I reckon I believe that even though I don’t understand it. I do know that
the Bible is a good book for revealin’ the Good Lord’s plans. Maybe He, God,
that is, always is speakin’ to me, to all of us. Maybe I just don’t listen.”
Nita smiled. “Perhaps you will one day, husband. Perhaps I
will. Maybe it is a gift given with old age. Perhaps it is a gift only given
when we can’ bear the burden of the gift.”
100.
They was quiet as they approached the huntin’ shack. Judah
was carryin’ Nita’s pack on his right shoulder. He held her hand with his left
hand. As they walked close to the shack Nita squeezed Judah’s hand tight. He
squeezed back an’ held on tight.
Light from the fire peaked out through the cracks in the
door jamb. They could smell the pleasant aroma of wood smoke. They both was
excited. They both was a little nervous.
Nita was glad the twilight was fadin’. Judah wouldn’t be
able to see the blush that rose on her cheeks.
Judah’s face an’ neck had the same blush. She didn’t need to
know that either.
When they arrived at the shack, Judah opened the door an’
swept his hand toward the inside.
“Here it is, darlin’. Our place in the high places. I’d give
you one of them big ol’ mansions on a hilltop if I could.”
Nita chuckled an’ stepped in. “This is all I need, Judah.
This is wonderful. Them twins. Them silly boys. Bless their hearts. This is
wonderful. I’d be fine in the little cabin prepared for us down the hill but
this is wonderful. I’m excited about livin’ there with you. I’m excited about
the wonder, the miracle of our unexpected life together.”
He agreed. He laid her pack on the bed platform just inside
the door. His was layin’ outside still. He stepped out an’ grabbed his pack.
Once it was laid on the unmade bed platform he looked around. He showed her the
note. Though she was learnin’ to read an’ write in English, her grasp of
written English was still shaky. He read the note to her.
Nita took the note from his hands. She looked at it
carefully. Then she held it close to her heart.
“I will cherish this, Judah. All this is our first weddin’
gift.”
“Nita, they have the bed all made up for us. It ain’t quite
a full size or nothin’. It’s wider than a single bed though. You think it’ll be
OK?” she asked sheepishly.
She laughed an’ grabbed Judah. “We might need to sleep close
if you let the fire go out, husband. I might have to send you to the other bed
if you snore.”
They both tried out the bed. Though it was close, they had
plenty of room.
“It will do just fine.” Nita proclaimed.
For the next few minutes, they made things ready for their
stay. Once they opened their packs an’ examined the supplies Abraham an’ Jacob
left, they realized there was enough supplies for several days.
Judah hung his bow an’ quiver up over the fireplace.
“Now, husband. You need to go outside as I get ready for
bed.” Nita said.
Her face was in full blush mode. Her statement made Judah
turn a bright red.
Judah quickly made his escape. He shut the door behind an’
stepped out into the dark.
101.
Judah stepped away from the huntin’ shack, their honeymoon
cabin. He walked away just a short distance. His mind was goin’ round an’ round
like a whirlwind.
As he stood there, he heard the wind pick up just a mite. Down
the path a short way he heard the calls of several whippoorwills. There an’
then yonder. That made him smile. He loved to hear their lonely call as they
sang their love song, as they called out seekin’ a mate.
It was especially lovely tonight. When Judah studied on them
calls, he realized he’d never be lonely again. His Nita was there, just there
in that ol’ huntin’ shack. What a miracle. What a great, unexpected blessin’
that was. What a joy to be Nita’s husband.
“My Nita.” He whispered to the wind.
As he stood there, waitin’, he paused.
Judah slowly turned his head from side to side. He weren’t
sure of what he heard. At first, he thought it was the muted sounds of the
merriment down below. Problem with that was the wind was blowin’ down the hill.
It couldn’t be liftin’ the distant voices of family up the mountain.
No, it weren’t that. Then he heard the whippoorwills again.
He strained to hear.
There, just there. Hear it? It was as if them little ol’
birds was sayin’ his name.
The wind, even the wind seemed to be callin’ to him.
Whisperin’ secrets he never heard before.
Odd, that’s what it was. Just odd. He must have had their
conversation about Kimeya on his mind.
Seemed like all around him them hills was callin’ to him,
whisperin’ to him, callin’ out his name. Like they was all of a sudden revealin’
secrets they always knew. Secrets he was just hearin’ for the first time.
He weren’t sure of what he was hearin’.
But there was somethin’ else. Another voice, other voices.
Voices from some other place, some other time.
Some of the voices was ancient voices. Some he didn’t even
understand. Not at first. As he strained to listen, he could almost make out
what they was sayin’.
Some of them voices whispered, carefully, stutterin’ things
like they hadn’t even happened yet.
Them was the hardest to hear.
Never heard nothin’ like it before.
Nita’s voice broke his concentration as she called to him.
She giggled sleepily an’ told him to come back in.
Judah turned, stepped to the door an’ placed his hand on the
wooden handle. He slowly opened the door. He didn’t want to forget what he was
hearin’.
Nita called to him from their bed. “What is it?”
He shook his head, “Not sure, sweetheart. Not really sure
what I heard.”
Judah paused again. He was half way through the doorway when
he stopped. He turned an’ looked out into the darkness.
For as he paused, it was as if he heard whispered voices, voices
an’ words spoken from a distance. Perhaps from some other place, some other
time. He almost could make out what was said.
Judah shook his head, as if he was comin’ out of a dream. He
weren’t sure just yet of what he heard. He weren’t much for that sort of thing.
Didn’t know why he heard anythin’ at all. He turned to step
inside.
Just as he started to close the door, he paused once again.
“There, just there. Do you hear it?” he thought to himself.
“Listen, Nita, do you hear what I hear? There it is again.
The sound of distant voices.”
Nita’s voice was warm an’ beginnin’ to sound sleepy.
“Come to bed, husband. It has been a long day. Come, get
into our bed with me, my love.”
102-1-ish
Aunt Bess Asher was at the boot of her car. Her an’ Myrtle
Lee was at the Abraham Carpenter Center. For the past several weeks she’d been
workin’ through the various journals an’ stacks of old documents, letters an’
papers found in that ol’ trunk Joe Henry found in the basement of his home.
That home that had been his grandparent’s an’ great grandparent’s home before
him.
What a treasure trove that big ol’ hump back trunk was.
Anyone knowin’ Aunt Bess Asher, knowin’ who she was an’ how she was would know
she was like a chicken on a June bug when she got hold of that trunk.
Folks all around Limestone Ridge Road was talkin’ about it.
Word got around fast, don’t you know. Why, Cash Collins, part time reporter for
the Manchester Enterprise over to Manchester, Kentucky came an’ interviewed
Aunt Bess about the historic find. He even took photos. Two of them photos
appeared along side his article in the newspaper.
The excitin’ thing for ol’ Cash was that several other
newspapers in that area down where Kentucky, Tennessee an’ Virginia come
together picked the story and photos up. That’s the first an’ only time one of Cash’s
stories was printed in another newspaper.
That week his story was probably read more than dear Myrtle
Shoupe’s “Printed as Written” column. Lots of folks get the Manchester
Enterprise just to read Myrtle’s column, don’t you know.
Folks all over was talkin’ about the treasure found on
Limestone Ridge Road.
It was old. She didn’t know how old. What she did know was
that although she grew up in that house, she’d never seen it nor heard a word
about the trunk bein’ down there in that basement.
Why, Joe Henry an’ Gene had to strap a couple ratchetin’
straps around it to haul it upstairs. It were so full they was afraid the
bottom would fall out when they lifted it.
After goin’ through it himself, Joe Henry showed it to his
Great Aunt Bess. They dug through it an’ decided it should go over to Aunt
Bess’ home so’s she could spend time goin’ through it at her leisure.
Once she got it there, she didn’t take no leisure goin’
through that trunk. She started lookin’ over the journals. She realized some of
them journals was written by the four original Carpenter brothers who secured
the land there on Limestone Ridge nearly two hundred years ago. Other journals,
forms, letters an’ documents was from several generations of heirs of them four
brothers.
What a treasure.
She laid out a long sheet of butcher paper on her kitchen
table an’ commenced to drawin’ a timeline of her family’s history based on the
genealogy she’d already completed over the years. She used the journals an’
other documents to add to an’ correct that timeline.
Aunt Bess filled a stack of notebooks plumb full of notes.
She began to mark, label an’ sort things by each brother an’ their heirs.
Stacks was then bundled an’ placed in separate containers.
Myrtle Lee stopped by one day an’ quickly became her
assistant. Myrtle Lee had an eye for the writin’ style from them
two-hundred-year-old journals an’ documents. She also had beautiful handwritin’
herself. Her transcriptions of the journals was often better than Aunt Bess’
own.
Along the way, one person after another livin’ there on
Limestone Ridge Road stopped by to get updates on her research. Folks stopped
in the Cabin Store just to be nosy an’ see what was in them journals.
Aunt Bess finally decided to have everyone over to the
Carpenter Center to see everything an’ to hear the stories she an’ Myrtle Lee was
beginnin’ to uncover in their research.
Too many folks wanted to hear about the family’s history to
meet at her home. She needed a large room. They needed a large room that also
allowed for folks to carry in a meal so’s they could enjoy breakin’ bread as
they learned more about their family history.
Today was actually the second meetin’ of the group. The
first time they spent four hours together goin’ over things. Much of that visit
was filled with everyone just lookin’ over the time line an’ perusin’ the notes
made thus far of the journals an’ other documents. Aunt Bess decided not to
allow folks to handle the actual journals an’ such.
It was a joy to watch one cousin an’ then another find
ancestors in the treasure trove of notes an’ on the timeline.
It was a chilly day. The sun was out but cold weather had
come to the mountains of Kentucky. Myrtle Lee already had her hands full of materials.
She turned an’ started toward the back door of the Carpenter Center.
Aunt Bess reached in an’ lifted out the box filled with several
journals written by Judah Carpenter. He was the most prolific journal keeper of
the family. All four men kept journals. Their mama, Selby Carpenter insisted on
givin’ them a good education back yonder in the wilds of the Tennessee
mountains. Journals was her way of makin’ sure they could read an’ write better
than the average mountaineer.
An unexpected wind swept down the mountain an; across the
road. It pushed toward Aunt Bess, liftin’ some of the loose papers in the box
she held. She smiled to herself. Up that mountain, the very mountain from where
the wind blew was one of her favorite places on the Carpenter land. Up yonder,
up that hillside was the original homestead of Judah Carpenter. He was the only
one that chose a high place for his homestead when the four brothers settled
here.
Though he was the oldest, the other three warned him that
place was not ideal for a cabin. Too far from any water source, they warned.
Judah showed them all when he dug a well up on that hillside. That well was one
of the best on the Ridge.
She took a deep breath in as the wind pushed gently against
her.
She paused just then, listenin’.
“Funny thing.” She thought to herself.
She stood real quiet like. Myrtle Lee was back out from the buildin’.
She too paused as she stepped close to Aunt Bess.
They both stood real quiet like, listenin’ as the wind
pushed gently against them.
“Hear that, Myrt? Hear that? Almost sounds like voices from
somewhere far away. Whispers like. Can’t make out what them voices are sayin’
though. You hear it?” Aunt Bess asked in a whisper.
She didn’t want to lose the sounds. Both ol’ women turned
their heads first this way an’ then another, tryin’ to catch the words,
seemingly from a distant place.
“Sounds an’ visions.” Myrtle Lee whispered. “Voices from
long ago, I expect.”
Aunt Bess shivered an’ nodded. “I expect you’re right.”
